IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hi! I'm Garrick Chow and welcome
to iTunes 10 Essential Training.
| | 00:07 | In this course, I'm going to take you
through all the most important things you
| | 00:10 | need to know about this latest version
of Apple's free and incredibly popular
| | 00:13 | music and media management program.
| | 00:15 | We'll start with the basics and
introduce you to the newly redesigned iTunes
| | 00:19 | 10 interface so that you'll be able to find
your way around the iTunes window and its controls.
| | 00:23 | You'll learn how to manage and
organize your music and video files, how to
| | 00:28 | create playlists, Smart Playlists, and how
to use the iTunes DJ and Genius Mixes feature.
| | 00:34 | I'll also be discussing how to share
your music over a network as well as how to
| | 00:39 | enable iTunes 10's Home Sharing
feature, which allows you to copy music and
| | 00:42 | other files from one computer to another.
| | 00:44 | We'll also go shopping on the iTunes
Store and look at the new integrated social
| | 00:50 | networking music service called Ping
so you can see what your friends and
| | 00:54 | favorite artists are listening to.
| | 00:55 | You'll find all of this and a lot
more in iTunes 10 Essential Training.
| | 01:00 | Let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you have a premium subscription to
the lynda.com Online Training Library, you
| | 00:04 | have access to the Exercise
Files used in this tutorial.
| | 00:07 | Just copy the Exercise Files folder to
your computer's Desktop or to another
| | 00:11 | convenient location.
| | 00:13 | Now due to licensing and copyright
restrictions, I can't provide you with all
| | 00:16 | the songs and videos used in these movies.
| | 00:18 | So you'll have to work with your own
songs on your own computer, but this is
| | 00:22 | probably a good thing if your
musical tastes don't match mine.
| | 00:25 | For the most part though, you can
learn what I'm showing you just by watching
| | 00:28 | and using the Excise Files I was able to
provide, or you can always try what I'm
| | 00:32 | showing you with any of your
own music and video files as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. The iTunes InterfaceOpening iTunes for the first time| 00:01 | Let's begin by opening
iTunes for the first time.
| | 00:03 | On a Mac, you'll most likely
have your iTunes icon in your dock.
| | 00:06 | So you can just click that or if you
don't see it in your dock, you'll also find
| | 00:09 | iTunes in your Applications folder.
| | 00:12 | If you're using Windows, you can
also open iTunes from a couple of places
| | 00:15 | depending on how you chose to install it.
| | 00:18 | You may have a shortcut to iTunes on
your Desktop or you can go to your Start menu,
| | 00:22 | to All Programs, and then find and open
the iTunes folder, and open iTunes from there.
| | 00:28 | So here on my Mac, I'll just
click the iTunes icon in my dock.
| | 00:31 | Now the very first time you run
iTunes, you may see the iTunes Software
| | 00:36 | License Agreement, which you're
supposed to read through and then agree to if
| | 00:39 | you want to run iTunes, and then
you'll see the iTunes Setup Assistant, which
| | 00:44 | walks you through the process of
getting iTunes set up on your computer using
| | 00:47 | a series of questions.
| | 00:48 | All you have to do here is just
navigate through these different screens.
| | 00:52 | The first one here is about Internet
Audio, asking me if I would like to use
| | 00:56 | iTunes to handle the audio
content from the Internet.
| | 00:59 | Essentially, what this means is if I
come across iTunes compatible music while
| | 01:02 | online, I can decide whether I want to
use iTunes as the default application
| | 01:06 | to play that content.
| | 01:07 | I'll just keep Yes selected and click Next.
| | 01:12 | iTunes is also going to offer to find
any music files that are already on your
| | 01:15 | computer and copy them
into your iTunes Music folder.
| | 01:17 | Here on my Mac, it's going
to look for MP3 and AAC files.
| | 01:22 | If you're on Windows, it will also ask
you if you want to locate WMA or other
| | 01:25 | Windows type audio files as well.
| | 01:27 | Now if you choose Yes, it will
actually search through your entire hard drive
| | 01:31 | and find files to copy into your iTunes Library.
| | 01:33 | My personal preference is to choose No.
| | 01:36 | I'll add them myself later, because my
personal computer has tons of audio files
| | 01:40 | that aren't music files and I don't
want or need them to be managed in iTunes.
| | 01:44 | But you can decide for yourself what to do here.
| | 01:46 | If you do choose Yes, and you have a
large hard drive, be prepared to wait a
| | 01:49 | little as iTunes searches
for all of your audio files.
| | 01:52 | So I'm going to keep No selected and click Next.
| | 01:56 | Now we have the Download Album Artwork
screen which just tells you a little bit
| | 01:59 | about how you can download album
artwork to go along with your music files.
| | 02:02 | Basically, this lets you see the
artwork for the album from which your music
| | 02:05 | came which is a nice touch.
| | 02:07 | We'll talk more about how to get and
add album artwork in a later movie.
| | 02:10 | So you'll only have to go through these
screens the first time you run iTunes.
| | 02:13 | Now if you recently upgraded iTunes
to a newer version, you might have to
| | 02:17 | re-agree to a licensing agreement or
read about new features or things like that,
| | 02:20 | but you should be able to make your
way through these things without any problems.
| | 02:24 | Now I click Done.
| | 02:26 | Next, you may see this welcome screen,
which gives you access to some short
| | 02:29 | video tutorials to help you get started.
| | 02:31 | You'll only see this the first time
you run iTunes, but if you accidentally
| | 02:34 | close it and want to go back to it to
watching the videos, you can do so by
| | 02:38 | going to the Help menu and choosing
iTunes Tutorials, which, as you can see,
| | 02:43 | brings that window back, but I don't really need
this right now so I'm going to close it again.
| | 02:49 | So now we're looking at the main iTunes window.
| | 02:51 | Currently, my iTunes Library is
completely empty because this is a new
| | 02:54 | installation of iTunes and I haven't
imported any music, video or other files yet,
| | 02:58 | but as you can see iTunes
suggests these ways to get you started by
| | 03:02 | either visiting the iTunes Store to
purchase music, or to import music from
| | 03:05 | your CD collection.
| | 03:06 | There is even access here to some of
those video tutorials to learn how to do
| | 03:09 | some of these things. But in any case,
we'll be talking about the iTunes Store
| | 03:13 | and how to import music a little bit
later, but first I want to take a look at
| | 03:16 | and familiarize ourselves with the
interface elements in the iTunes window.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring the Source pane| 00:00 | For this movie, I have imported a
bunch of songs into my iTunes Library.
| | 00:04 | In the next chapter, we'll take a
detailed look at how to get music into iTunes.
| | 00:08 | So if you're not quite sure how to do that,
you don't really need to worry about it for now.
| | 00:10 | I just needed to get some music in here
so I can effectively demonstrate some of
| | 00:14 | the features of the
iTunes interface in this movie.
| | 00:16 | When we'll get to the next chapter, we'll
start with a brand-new empty library again.
| | 00:20 | So let's start by taking a look at the
source pane on the left side of the iTunes window.
| | 00:24 | Basically, what you have selected in
the source pane determines what you see in
| | 00:27 | the main section of the window and you
can see that the source pane is divided
| | 00:31 | into several categories including Library,
Store, Shared, Genius, Playlists, and so on.
| | 00:37 | Now depending on how your
preferences are set, you may see more or fewer
| | 00:40 | categories in your own source pane
than you see here, but we'll talk about
| | 00:43 | that in just a minute.
| | 00:44 | We'll start by taking a look at the Library.
| | 00:46 | The most important basic thing to
realize about the Library is that it
| | 00:49 | contains all the files that are
stored on the computer you're using this
| | 00:52 | particular copy of iTunes on.
| | 00:54 | Later, we'll look at things like Shared
Libraries, which lets you access content
| | 00:57 | on other computers running iTunes on
your network, but everything under the
| | 01:00 | Library category here in the source
pane is stuff that's on your computer.
| | 01:05 | Now the Library is divided into
multiple categories because really we're
| | 01:08 | long beyond the days in which iTunes was
just a program to manage your music collection.
| | 01:12 | These days, you can use iTunes to
organize and play music, movies, TV shows,
| | 01:17 | podcasts, and books, as well as use it to
manage the apps and ring tones on your iPhone.
| | 01:22 | So it makes good sense to have
these category divisions in the Library.
| | 01:25 | If we still only had one main
library for all of these things, like in
| | 01:28 | earlier versions of iTunes, it would
be really difficult to find the files
| | 01:32 | you are looking for.
| | 01:33 | So now you select Music to see your
music collection or Movies to see your
| | 01:36 | movie collection or TV Shows to
see TV shows and so on and so on.
| | 01:40 | This is a nicely organized way to view and
find the content you have stored in iTunes.
| | 01:44 | Now if you don't use all of these
things like, for example, you don't have an
| | 01:47 | iPhone or iPod Touch and therefore have
no need for apps for those devices, you
| | 01:52 | can turn any of these categories off
by going to iTunes > Preferences and if
| | 01:56 | you're on Windows, you will go to the
Edit menu and choose Preferences from there,
| | 01:58 | and then under the General
category, you can un-check the categories you
| | 02:03 | don't want or need to see.
| | 02:04 | Now notice you get this warning
essentially telling you that if you turn off
| | 02:07 | a category, the items that fall under this
category won't be accessible at all from library.
| | 02:12 | So even if I do have apps in my library,
if I un-check that category, I won't be
| | 02:16 | able to get to them.
| | 02:18 | To get to the items in any
particular category, you have to have that
| | 02:20 | category turned on.
| | 02:21 | So I'm just going to cancel this for now
and I'll click OK just to close Preferences.
| | 02:27 | So that's an overview of the Library.
| | 02:29 | The next item we find here is Store
which is where you can access the iTunes
| | 02:33 | Store to purchase music, movies, TV
shows, iPhone apps and iPod games,
| | 02:37 | podcasts, and so on.
| | 02:39 | We'll be looking a lot
more at the Store later on.
| | 02:41 | Now if you've purchased content from
the Store, you'll also find a Purchased
| | 02:45 | category here which is where you can
quickly access all of the content you've
| | 02:48 | bought in one location and you will
also see a Downloads category under Store
| | 02:52 | when you're actively
downloading purchased content.
| | 02:54 | New to iTunes 10, we also find Ping
under the Store and Ping is Apple's
| | 02:59 | social networking service for
interacting with your friends and artists to
| | 03:02 | see who's buying what music or you
can tell them what music you've been
| | 03:05 | buying or listening to.
| | 03:07 | We'll talk a lot more
about Ping later on as well.
| | 03:10 | Next, we have Shared for accessing
and playing content from other iTunes
| | 03:13 | libraries on other computers
connected to your home or office network.
| | 03:16 | Now this Shared area is also where
you'll turn on the Home Sharing function,
| | 03:20 | which allows you to copy content
from other iTunes libraries from another
| | 03:23 | computer on your network to your
personal iTunes library on your own computer.
| | 03:27 | This was a much-welcomed feature
that was introduced in iTunes 9 and more
| | 03:31 | than that later as well.
| | 03:32 | Under that, we have Genius, which is a
feature that examines your library and
| | 03:35 | automatically builds playlists and
makes suggestions of other songs or artists
| | 03:39 | you might like based on what's in your library.
| | 03:41 | Now if you don't see the Genius
playlist, you can go back to iTunes >
| | 03:45 | Preferences, and just make sure that
option is checked or if you don't like
| | 03:48 | Genius or use it, you
can turn it off here as well.
| | 03:51 | Now it may actually be grayed out
and we'll talk about why that is in a
| | 03:54 | later movie as well.
| | 03:56 | Finally, we have our Playlists category.
| | 03:58 | Playlists have, of course, been a
part of iTunes from the start and you can
| | 04:01 | still create regular and Smart
Playlists like before and they'll all be found
| | 04:05 | here under the Playlists heading.
| | 04:06 | Now you will occasionally see
other items appear in this source area.
| | 04:09 | For instance, if you insert an audio CD,
which I'll do right now, you can see it
| | 04:15 | appears here under a heading labeled
Devices and the device in this case is my
| | 04:18 | CD player in my computer. Or if you
connect an iPod or iPhone to your computer,
| | 04:22 | it will show up here under Devices as
well, and I've got an iPod here, which I'll
| | 04:26 | connect, and here you can see it
appearing right under Devices as well.
| | 04:30 | So Devices will only show up when you have a
device or a CD inserted into your computer.
| | 04:34 | All right, so that's the rundown
of the source pane in iTunes 10.
| | 04:38 | Again the most important thing to take
away from this is depending on what you
| | 04:41 | have selected in the source pane, you'll
see different things appear in the main
| | 04:44 | portion of the window.
| | 04:45 | So just bear that in mind as
we continue to work with iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the playback controls| 00:01 | In this movie, I want to provide a
brief overview of some of the basic playback
| | 00:04 | controls found in iTunes.
| | 00:06 | Now we'll get a much more detailed look
at playback options when we get to the
| | 00:09 | chapter on playing your content, but for
now I just want to introduce you to the
| | 00:12 | necessary controls to get us through
this chapter and the following chapter on
| | 00:16 | importing our content.
| | 00:17 | Again, if you haven't imported any
music into your library yet, don't worry.
| | 00:20 | This is just an overview and
you can just sit back and watch.
| | 00:23 | Basically, you'll find the playback
controls in the upper left-hand corner
| | 00:26 | of the iTunes window.
| | 00:28 | Currently, only the Play button is
not grayed out because I have no songs
| | 00:31 | selected in my library.
| | 00:32 | So I can browse through, find a song
that I want to play, click it once to
| | 00:37 | select it, and the quickest way to play
a song is to just double-click it, and
| | 00:44 | now the song is playing.
| | 00:45 | (Music playing)
| | 00:46 | Notice the Play button
has become a Pause button.
| | 00:49 | We also now have the Rewind and
Fast-forward buttons available.
| | 00:53 | Clicking the Pause button obviously pauses
the song and now it's the Play button again.
| | 00:58 | Clicking that button again plays
the song from where we left off.
| | 01:04 | And I'll pause that again.
| | 01:06 | Now double-clicking a song always
starts it from the beginning even if you
| | 01:09 | double-click a song that's currently playing.
| | 01:10 | So if I double-click this song again,
you can see it starts from the beginning.
| | 01:17 | So don't double-click tracks unless
you want to start them over again.
| | 01:20 | Either use the Play button or use the
Spacebar in your keyboard, which acts as
| | 01:23 | the Play/Pause button for iTunes as well.
| | 01:26 | The Rewind and Fast-forward buttons
work in two different ways,depending on if
| | 01:29 | you just click them or if you hold them down.
| | 01:31 | Let me start the song playing again.
| | 01:33 | (Music playing)
| | 01:34 | Now holding down the buttons
either rewinds the current song or fast-forwards it.
| | 01:42 | (Music playing)
| | 01:46 | Now you can keep track of where
you are in the song by looking at the
| | 01:49 | center display area here.
| | 01:50 | Let me go ahead and pause this again.
| | 01:52 | This diamond shape shows you where you
are and the times displays on either side
| | 01:56 | show you how much time is
elapsed and how much time remains.
| | 01:59 | Now you can drag this diamond shape
left and right to quickly scrub to an
| | 02:03 | area of the song or just click anywhere in
the playback indicator to jump to that location.
| | 02:08 | This is a lot faster than just using
the Fast-forward and Rewind buttons.
| | 02:13 | Now if I simply click the Fast-forward
or Rewind buttons, whether anything is
| | 02:16 | playing or not, they act as
the Next and Previous buttons.
| | 02:20 | So you can see this little speaker icon going
to the next song when I click the Next button.
| | 02:26 | So when the music is paused, you can
see that the speaker icon just jumps to
| | 02:30 | your selected track, but it won't start
playing until you actually hit the Play button.
| | 02:34 | (Music playing)
| | 02:35 | Now while it's playing, if I hit the
Next button or Previous button, the music
| | 02:41 | will continue to play.
| | 02:42 | Let's look the center display again.
| | 02:46 | We've already seen how you can click or
drag the playback indicator to jump to
| | 02:50 | another part of the song and above that
we can see how it displays the name of
| | 02:54 | the song, the artist, and the name of the album.
| | 02:58 | Some of the other items you'll find
in the center display area, this small
| | 03:01 | button here, which looks like a tiny
play button, switches the display to the
| | 03:04 | graphic VU meter, which when the
song is playing shows you a graphic
| | 03:10 | representation of the frequencies
of the two stereo channels of song.
| | 03:14 | Now as far as I can tell, this serves no
other purpose than to look kind of cool
| | 03:17 | when music is playing, but we'll see
later that there is much more interesting
| | 03:20 | stuff to turn on when you want some
eye candy to go along with your music.
| | 03:23 | So I'll just toggle that back again by
clicking the button once more to display
| | 03:27 | the song information.
| | 03:30 | Now depending on what iTunes is doing,
you might see other things in the center
| | 03:33 | display as you click this button.
| | 03:34 | For example, if you're copying songs to
your iPod or importing music from a CD,
| | 03:38 | the progress status of those activities
are also displayed up here and you can
| | 03:42 | toggle through them using the same button.
| | 03:43 | Now another playback control you'll
find up here is the Volume slider, which you
| | 03:50 | can drag left and right to reduce
or increase the volume of the music.
| | 03:53 | (Music playing)
| | 03:57 | Now this volume control is
independent of your computer's volume control.
| | 04:01 | So if you have the volume cranked up
in iTunes all the way to the top, but
| | 04:04 | it's still not loud enough for you,
you can turn up your computer's volume or
| | 04:07 | your speaker's volume.
| | 04:09 | Okay, two more buttons I want to show
you here, which I think are important to
| | 04:12 | know about right off the bat in
case you think iTunes is acting weird.
| | 04:15 | In the lower left-hand corner,
there is this button with the sort of
| | 04:18 | cross-looking arrows and
that's called the Shuffle button.
| | 04:20 | You can see a little tooltip pops
up when I hover my mouse over it.
| | 04:25 | So when selected, it will shuffle
or randomize the playback of songs.
| | 04:29 | So if I have that selected, when my
current song reaches the end, it most likely
| | 04:33 | won't play the immediate next track,
but instead will pick the next song
| | 04:36 | randomly for my library or selected playlist.
| | 04:39 | As I click the Next button now, if
you look in the center display, you can
| | 04:42 | see the next song that it's actually selected.
| | 04:44 | So you can see it's actually
jumping all over the place here.
| | 04:46 | Now I only point this out now,
because it can be confusing if you mean to
| | 04:50 | jump to the next song in your library
or playlist and then have it jump to
| | 04:53 | some other random song.
| | 04:54 | If that happens, check to make sure
the Shuffle button is not selected.
| | 04:58 | Next to Shuffle, we have the Repeat button.
| | 05:00 | When I hover over it, you can see the
tooltip that tells me the options are to
| | 05:03 | play the playlist just once, repeat
the playlist, or repeat just one song.
| | 05:08 | Without this button selected, the
song's currently selected, whether you have
| | 05:11 | your entire library selected or just
single playlist, will play one after
| | 05:15 | another top to bottom and will
stop when it reaches the end.
| | 05:18 | If you click the Repeat button just once,
it's going to, in this case, repeat my
| | 05:22 | entire library because I have
my entire music library selected.
| | 05:25 | If I had a playlist selected,
it would repeat just that entire playlist.
| | 05:29 | Now if I have a specific song selected
like I have here and I click the Repeat
| | 05:32 | button another time, I see this 1
appear over the button indicating that
| | 05:37 | only this one selected song will be
repeated over and over again until I stop playback.
| | 05:42 | So just be aware that the Repeat
button is here too, just in case you
| | 05:44 | accidentally click it and wonder
why the same song is playing nonstop.
| | 05:47 | So I'll click to turn that off.
| | 05:49 | Lastly, I want to point out the
display on the bottom of the iTunes window,
| | 05:53 | which tells you how many items are in
the library you have selected, which in my
| | 05:56 | case, I have 692 songs in my entire
library and it also tells me that that's
| | 06:01 | 1.7 days full of music,
totaling a file size of 2.60 gigabytes.
| | 06:07 | Clicking this display gives
you the actual precise count.
| | 06:10 | So in my case, I have again 692
songs, which is one day, 18 hours, 30
| | 06:15 | minutes and 46 seconds of music, and I can
click it again to set it back to the other display.
| | 06:20 | So those are the basic playback
controls and displays I wanted to familiarize
| | 06:24 | you with before we moved on.
| | 06:25 | Again, we'll be getting more into
playback options when we get to the chapter
| | 06:28 | on playing your content, but for now,
that's the info you need until we get to that point.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting general preferences| 00:01 | In this movie, I would like to walk you
through some of the general preferences
| | 00:03 | that for the most part control what
you see in the main iTunes window.
| | 00:07 | I am going to go to
iTunes Preferences on my Mac.
| | 00:10 | Again, if you're on Windows, you'll go
to the Edit menu and choose Preferences
| | 00:13 | from there, and here I am going to
make sure I am in the General category.
| | 00:18 | And what we find in here are
preferences for how certain items are displayed
| | 00:21 | in the iTunes window.
| | 00:22 | We saw earlier that the items found in
the Show section let you show or hide the
| | 00:26 | various categories found under the
Library section of the Source pane over here.
| | 00:29 | So let's work our way down from the
top of General Preferences, and examine
| | 00:32 | the rest of this area.
| | 00:33 | At the top of the window,
we have our library name.
| | 00:37 | If you've set up your iTunes Library
to be shared with other iTunes users on
| | 00:40 | your network, this is the name that will
appear in their copy of iTunes, letting
| | 00:43 | them know that this is your collection.
| | 00:45 | If you want to change your name,
just select within here and retype
| | 00:48 | whatever name you like.
| | 00:49 | Just be sure people will be able to
tell that it's your library if you plan on
| | 00:52 | sharing your collection on your network.
| | 00:54 | We'll be talking more about
sharing the library in a later chapter.
| | 00:57 | Next we have three menus that determine
the appearance of the text and display
| | 01:00 | in the main iTunes window.
| | 01:02 | The Source Text is a text
that appears in the Source pane.
| | 01:05 | If you find it difficult to read this
in its default size, you can select Large
| | 01:10 | and if I click OK you'll see the results
there, and basically it's increased in size.
| | 01:14 | Let's go back to Preferences.
| | 01:16 | Now the List Text menu determines the
size of the text when you're browsing
| | 01:20 | through your Library in List view.
| | 01:21 | So let's make that Large too.
| | 01:23 | I will click OK so you can see the
text here has become larger as well.
| | 01:27 | So no matter what view we were looking
at here, and we'll look at these views a
| | 01:30 | little bit later, the text has
gotten a little bit larger for those.
| | 01:34 | Now this is Grid view and we
have an option for that as well.
| | 01:38 | You can see the Grid view
background can be either Light or Dark.
| | 01:41 | If I choose Dark and click OK,
you can see what that looks like.
| | 01:45 | Let's go back to Preferences again.
| | 01:48 | I am going to go back and change my
Source Text to Small and my List Text to
| | 01:52 | Small but I kind of like that dark background.
| | 01:55 | So I think I am going to keep that, and
of course, you can set your own size and
| | 01:58 | grid preferences however you like.
| | 02:00 | In the next section of these General
Preferences, we determine what happens when
| | 02:03 | you insert an audio CD into your computer.
| | 02:05 | We have the options to Show CD, Begin
Playing, Ask To Import CD, Import CD and
| | 02:11 | Import CD And Eject.
| | 02:12 | Now Show CD merely shows the CD as a
device in your Source pane and does nothing
| | 02:16 | else, and the rest of these are
pretty self-explanatory as well.
| | 02:19 | You can have the CD start playing immediately.
| | 02:21 | You can have iTunes ask you if you
want import the CD, or you can import it
| | 02:25 | automatically as soon as you insert it,
or you can import the CD and then have
| | 02:29 | iTunes eject it from your
computer when it's done.
| | 02:32 | This last setting could be useful if
you're importing several CDs at once.
| | 02:35 | So you would insert a CD, it would be
automatically imported into your Library
| | 02:39 | and then ejected. All you would have to
do is keep feeding new CDs into computer
| | 02:42 | drive as it spits out the imported ones.
| | 02:45 | Now this is also where you can adjust
your import settings but we'll talk about
| | 02:48 | that in the next chapter.
| | 02:49 | Now the last option here is to Check
for new software updates automatically,
| | 02:53 | and that's checked by default which
means that each time you open up iTunes,
| | 02:57 | iTunes will connect to the Internet
and check if any iTunes software updates
| | 03:00 | are available and if so, it'll ask you if
you want to download and install the updates.
| | 03:04 | I recommend keeping this checked
because Apple frequently release updates which
| | 03:07 | usually fix bugs or add functionality to iTunes.
| | 03:11 | So those were the General
Preferences found in iTunes.
| | 03:13 | Again, you can just come in here and
set them however you like and when you're
| | 03:16 | done click OK, and you'll see the
changes appear in your iTunes window.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring the interface differences in the Mac and Windows versions| 00:01 | In this movie, let's take a look at
some of the window options that are
| | 00:03 | available on iTunes, and by window
options I'm referring to the various
| | 00:07 | buttons found all over the iTunes window and
that affect how the window appears and behaves.
| | 00:11 | Now this is one of those areas where
the Mac and Windows versions of iTunes
| | 00:14 | are a little different.
| | 00:15 | So I am going to start here on the Mac
and then I will switch over to Windows to
| | 00:18 | show you basically the same features
but how activating these features is
| | 00:21 | slightly different between the two versions.
| | 00:24 | So let's start with the four View
buttons up here in the upper right-hand corner.
| | 00:27 | These are basically the four-ways in which
you can view and browse through your Library.
| | 00:31 | You have the song List view, which is you can
see displays all of your media as a long list.
| | 00:35 | New to iTunes 10, you have the Album
List view, which is like the song list
| | 00:39 | view but the nice thing about the
Album List view is that if you have five or
| | 00:42 | more songs from an album, iTunes displays
the cover artwork of that album to the left.
| | 00:47 | This actually makes it a little
easier to see where albums begin and end,
| | 00:49 | especially if you have
several albums from the same artist.
| | 00:53 | So instead of seeing a huge list of songs,
it's very easy to discern those songs
| | 00:56 | and their individual albums with Album view.
| | 00:58 | You also have the Grid view, which
shows you your media in a grid displaying
| | 01:02 | album artwork along with artist names,
and you also have the cover-flow view,
| | 01:07 | which allows you to flow through the
album covers on the top pane here, while
| | 01:11 | the contents of the album are displayed below.
| | 01:12 | We'll go into more detail with these
views and their options a little bit later
| | 01:16 | but for now I just wanted to point them out.
| | 01:19 | Next, we have our standard three
buttons in the upper left-hand corner.
| | 01:21 | For some reason, in version 10, Apple
made these buttons vertical instead of
| | 01:25 | horizontal like they are in just about
every other application on the Mac, but
| | 01:29 | they still function the same way.
| | 01:30 | The first or top button is the Close button
just like in most applications on the Mac.
| | 01:34 | If I click it, the window closes,
but notice iTunes doesn't quit.
| | 01:38 | It's still running as
the front-most application.
| | 01:40 | Now if I had music playing, the music would
continue to play even when I close the window.
| | 01:44 | I can always bring back the main
iTunes window either by selecting Window >
| | 01:48 | iTunes or by using the
keyboard command of Option+Command+1.
| | 01:52 | Next, we have the Minimize button.
| | 01:53 | Again as with most OS X applications,
clicking that button sends the window to
| | 01:57 | the dock and I can bring
that back by clicking it again.
| | 02:02 | Now the third button behaves a little
bit differently in iTunes then it does in
| | 02:05 | other OS X applications.
| | 02:07 | Normally this button lets you toggle
between a window's maximum size and its
| | 02:10 | previous size but when I click it in
iTunes, I get what's called the Mini Player
| | 02:16 | and you can see this is a minimalistic,
stripped-down iTunes window that just
| | 02:20 | gives me the display and some playback controls.
| | 02:22 | Let me go ahead and maximize this
again and let me play some music.
| | 02:27 | (Music playing)
| | 02:30 | So if I start the music playing and I
switch to the Mini Player, you can see
| | 02:35 | that it displays all the same
information in the display portion of the iTunes
| | 02:38 | window so I can see the song name, the artist.
| | 02:42 | I can toggle through it to see the graphic EQ.
| | 02:46 | I can adjust the volume.
| | 02:47 | I can pause playback,
fast-forward, rewind and so on.
| | 02:52 | So the Mini Player is nice because I
can just drag it to a corner of my screen
| | 02:56 | out of the way, start some music playing,
and then get on with whatever else
| | 02:59 | I am doing but at the same time I'll be
able to see the name of the song or artist
| | 03:03 | that's currently playing and if I want
to skip a song or something like that, I
| | 03:06 | can easily access the controls.
| | 03:07 | Now we do have additional
options under Preferences.
| | 03:11 | If we go to the Advanced section, and
in here I can check Keep Mini Player on
| | 03:15 | top of all other windows, which is a
nice feature to turned on if you have the
| | 03:19 | screen real estate to spare.
| | 03:21 | So with that option checked,
I can have some music playing
| | 03:27 | and let's say I bring up my web browser.
| | 03:29 | (Music playing)
| | 03:31 | Notice that the Mini Player stays in
complete view even though iTunes is not the
| | 03:34 | active application right now. We can
see that Safari is the active application.
| | 03:38 | So no matter how many windows or
applications I am running, the Mini Player
| | 03:41 | stays on top of those windows so I
always have quick access to control my music.
| | 03:48 | Now another option we have with the Mini
Player is to turn it into the mini Mini Player.
| | 03:53 | By grabbing the lower right-hand corner
of the window, and dragging to the left
| | 03:56 | we can see that hides the display
area and now I have a very tiny playback
| | 04:00 | controller that I can tuck
away in the corner of my screen.
| | 04:02 | I just can't see which song is playing
but I can always re-expand the player by
| | 04:07 | dragging the lower-right hand
corner out again to see that information.
| | 04:11 | It's a pretty nice way to be able to
control your iTunes music without having
| | 04:14 | to open this big window every time I want
to just pause or advance to the next song.
| | 04:19 | Now along those lines, let's say
instead of using the Mini Player, maybe I don't
| | 04:23 | have room on my screen to display it at
the moment, I'll just minimize it to my
| | 04:26 | dock or I could even hide it.
| | 04:28 | Now I can also control playback by
right-clicking the iTunes icon in the
| | 04:32 | dock and that reveals options to
rate the current song. We'll talk about
| | 04:37 | ratings a little bit later.
| | 04:38 | We can also change our repeat options,
shuffle the songs, Play the currently
| | 04:43 | selected song, jump to the next one,
jump to do the previous, play recently
| | 04:47 | played songs, and we have
several other options here.
| | 04:50 | Notice at the top it even does display
the currently playing song so I can check
| | 04:53 | that information very easily just
by right-clicking on the iTunes icon.
| | 04:58 | So those are some of the window
playback options that are available here on the
| | 05:01 | Mac side of things.
Let's take look at the Windows side.
| | 05:04 | So here we are looking at the Windows
version of iTunes and you can see it looks
| | 05:07 | very similar to the Mac version and it
has pretty much all the same features we
| | 05:11 | just looked at on the Mac but accessing
them is little bit different. The four views,
| | 05:15 | the song list view, album list, grid,
and cover flow are all identical to the
| | 05:18 | Mac so there is nothing new
or different to mention there.
| | 05:21 | As with most Windows applications, the
three main windows buttons are found in
| | 05:24 | the upper right-hand corner instead
of in the upper left like on the Mac.
| | 05:27 | The first button is the minimize
button, which minimizes iTunes down to the
| | 05:30 | Taskbar, and I can bring it back by
clicking it again, which you can see it
| | 05:35 | toggle between a smaller iTunes window or
maximizing it to the entire size of my screen.
| | 05:39 | Now in Windows, the third button,
the X button is that quit button, which is
| | 05:43 | different than on the Mac side where
we have a button that just closes the
| | 05:45 | iTunes window but leaves
iTunes open and running.
| | 05:48 | Here in Windows, when I click
this button, iTunes actually quits.
| | 05:51 | You see it's no longer down
here in the Taskbar anywhere.
| | 05:54 | I'll just open it again from my Desktop icon.
| | 05:59 | So those are some of the differences
between the three buttons found on the Mac
| | 06:02 | version of the iTunes window and the
Windows version of the iTunes window.
| | 06:06 | Also none of these buttons on the
Windows side give you the Mini Player.
| | 06:09 | To get the Mini Player, you'll have to
go to the View menu and choose Switch to
| | 06:12 | Mini Player, and this Mini Player
behaves exactly the same as the Mac version.
| | 06:16 | You can also drag the lower-right hand
corner to give you the mini Mini Player as well.
| | 06:21 | Now you'll also find the same
preferences for keeping the Mini Player on top of
| | 06:25 | all of all other windows by going to
Edit > Preferences and under Advanced,
| | 06:29 | you'll find Keep Mini Player on top of
all the windows, and again checking this
| | 06:34 | option gives you quick access
to the Mini Player at all times.
| | 06:37 | Now also on the Windows side, you
have the Show iTunes icon in system tray
| | 06:41 | option, which is checked by default,
and that means when iTunes is running,
| | 06:44 | you'll see the icon in your system tray.
| | 06:47 | Another option is Minimize
iTunes window to system tray.
| | 06:50 | So if I check that and click OK, now
when I click the minimize button, notice
| | 06:56 | iTunes no longer appears in the main
Taskbar, which is kind of nice if your
| | 06:59 | Taskbar is usually cluttered
with other applications and windows.
| | 07:02 | Instead you can get back to iTunes by
double-clicking its icon in the system tray.
| | 07:07 | So there you have the basic differences
between the Mac and Windows versions of
| | 07:11 | iTunes as far as their
window options are concerned.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting parental controls| 00:01 | Now let's take a look at iTunes 10's
parental control options, which are really
| | 00:04 | just another way of controlling what
appears in the iTunes window but aims
| | 00:07 | towards locking down certain features or
areas form kids whose parents might not
| | 00:11 | want them to accessing certain content.
| | 00:12 | Let's go to iTunes > Preferences, again,
if you are on Windows you'll go to Edit
| | 00:17 | > Preferences, and in here you'll find
an area called Parental. On Windows it is
| | 00:21 | labeled Parental Control.
| | 00:23 | Now to make any changes in here you have to
have an Administrator account on your computer.
| | 00:27 | So the other part of this equation
is to make sure your kids don't have
| | 00:30 | Administrator access to your computer.
| | 00:32 | Let's work our way down the list here.
| | 00:33 | We have four main Disable checkboxes.
Checking Podcasts disables users from
| | 00:38 | downloading, listening to or watching podcasts.
| | 00:41 | Some podcasts have explicit content
and if you don't want your kid having
| | 00:44 | access to them you just check Podcasts in
here that removes podcasts from the Source pane.
| | 00:48 | So notice I have a Podcast section
here. If I click OK it's gone and if I go
| | 00:54 | to the iTunes Store, and we don't
entire chapter on Store coming up later, and
| | 00:59 | if I go find a Podcast, maybe the PBS NewsHour,
| | 01:05 | notice I can't click the Subscribe
button or even double-click any of the
| | 01:09 | podcasts to preview them.
| | 01:11 | So podcasts are entirely
locked out at this point.
| | 01:13 | All right, let's go back to Preferences.
| | 01:17 | Checking Radio disables Internet
Radio, we'll talk more about radio later
| | 01:20 | but basically iTunes can connect to
dozens of free streaming Internet radio
| | 01:24 | sites and again some of these carry
explicit content so you can check this option here.
| | 01:29 | Now beyond controlling the content that
can stream to your computer you may also
| | 01:32 | want to disable radio, just because your
kids leave the radio streams on all the
| | 01:36 | time by accident, which can eat up
some of the bandwidth and slow down other
| | 01:39 | computers on your home network.
| | 01:41 | Whatever the reason, just check
Radio to removed it from the Source pane.
| | 01:43 | So again I'll click OK and
you can see Radio is gone.
| | 01:46 | Next we can disable the iTunes Store.
| | 01:49 | This will prevent users from even
accessing or browsing the Store.
| | 01:52 | Now also you do have an option to leave
access to iTunes U, so if you want your
| | 01:56 | kid to be able to download iTunes U
content for school you can check that option,
| | 02:00 | while still restricting access
to the rest of the iTunes Store.
| | 02:03 | So notice if I leave Allow Access to
iTunes U checked and click OK ,the Store
| | 02:08 | switches to the iTunes U page but
I can't get to any other content.
| | 02:12 | I keep getting this "My
request cannot be completed" message.
| | 02:16 | Now on the other hand, if I go back to
Preferences and disable iTunes U content
| | 02:22 | and click OK, notice the Store
completely disappears from my Source pane.
| | 02:28 | Lastly we have Shared Libraries, which
disable iTunes for being able to connect
| | 02:31 | to other iTunes Libraries on
other computers on your network.
| | 02:34 | So those were the four main Disable checkboxes.
| | 02:37 | Next we have the Ratings For menu,
which essentially lets you set the rating
| | 02:41 | system for the country you are in.
| | 02:42 | Notice if I switch to different
countries, the ratings in the menus below
| | 02:46 | change appropriately.
| | 02:47 | So there is Switzerland, here
is Greece, which uses K13, 12+.
| | 02:51 | I am going to switch mine back to the
United States since that's where I am.
| | 02:56 | If you want to display the ratings of
the items in your Library so you can
| | 02:59 | easily see the ratings for video next to
its name, just keep the option that says
| | 03:02 | Show content ratings in library checked.
| | 03:05 | So for example, if I've downloaded any
R-rated movies I would see the R rating
| | 03:08 | next to them in my library.
| | 03:10 | Under the Content Restrictions area
you can limit what's displayed in the
| | 03:13 | Library to Movies, TV, iPod
Applications, under specific rating levels.
| | 03:18 | So if I only want to see movies that
are rated G I would select that and check
| | 03:22 | that box or as another example, if
you wanted to allow your kids access to
| | 03:26 | some podcasts, but not those which have
been labeled as explicit, and Apple is
| | 03:30 | pretty good at making sure
producers have explicit content label their
| | 03:33 | products as such, you can maybe
leave Podcast unchecked under Disable and
| | 03:38 | check Restrict explicit content.
| | 03:39 | You'll see this message saying, "When you
restrict explicit, you won't be able to
| | 03:43 | preview or purchase or subscribe to content."
| | 03:45 | When you check that option you'll see
this message telling you that you that you
| | 03:47 | won't be able to preview, purchase or
subscribe to content on your iTunes Store
| | 03:51 | that's marked explicit,
which is exactly what we want.
| | 03:54 | So you can see it's fairly easy to
make iTunes a safer place for your kids to
| | 03:57 | navigate and spend time in.
| | 03:59 | Now just to reiterate here, users who
have Administrator accounts can easily
| | 04:02 | bypass these settings by coming into
iTunes Preferences and making changes.
| | 04:06 | So if you're setting up parental
controls for your kids make sure you give them
| | 04:10 | regular user account on your Mac or
Windows machine and apply these settings to
| | 04:13 | their copy of iTunes in
their accounts, not yours.
| | 04:16 | Then when you're done setting the
parental controls, you can click the Lock icon.
| | 04:19 | You'll be asked to enter your
Administrator password and from that point on,
| | 04:24 | only users with an admin password can
make changes to the parental controls.
| | 04:28 | I am going to unlock this and I am just
going to uncheck everything in here to
| | 04:33 | allow myself full access to everything again.
| | 04:36 | So those were the parental
control options in iTunes 10.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using keyboard shortcuts| 00:01 | Sometimes, instead of using the iTunes
buttons to control the playback of your
| | 00:04 | music it's much easier and
quicker to use keyboard shortcuts.
| | 00:07 | Like in many applications you can
control many of iTunes' most useful functions
| | 00:11 | using only your keyboard. Of course
you have to learn these keyboard shortcuts
| | 00:14 | before you can use them.
| | 00:16 | If you go to the Help menu and choose
Keyboard Shortcuts and this is the same
| | 00:19 | on both Mac and Windows, you'll get
a listing of the keyboard shortcuts
| | 00:23 | available in iTunes and you can see
they are arranged by category. We have
| | 00:26 | Playback shortcuts, Library and
Playlist shortcuts, iPod shortcuts, iPhone
| | 00:32 | shortcuts and so on and so on.
| | 00:35 | So for example, here at the top,
I can see that the Return key or Enter in
| | 00:39 | Windows will play the
selected song from the beginning.
| | 00:41 | So I do have a song here selected in
iTunes. So if I press Return on my keyboard
| | 00:46 | you can see it starts playing.
| | 00:49 | (Music playing)
| | 00:51 | Now you may also know that pressing the
Spacebar plays and pauses the song too.
| | 00:55 | And we can see here that the difference
between the Spacebar and the Return or
| | 00:58 | Enter key is that Return or Enter
starts the song playing from the beginning,
| | 01:03 | regardless of whether you're in the
middle of the song someplace, while the
| | 01:05 | Spacebar pauses and plays the
song from wherever you left off.
| | 01:11 | Now there are a lot of keyboard
shortcuts in here and you probably won't use all
| | 01:14 | of them, but I highly encourage you to
check out this list and at least learn
| | 01:18 | the ones under Control menu shortcuts
which give you the most common commands
| | 01:21 | like playing and pausing your music,
navigating to the previous or next song,
| | 01:25 | increasing or decreasing
volume, and ejecting a CD.
| | 01:28 | Now this isn't a requirement of course,
but I am a keyboard shortcut user and I
| | 01:33 | just think the most times it's much
quicker to use these shortcuts than it is to
| | 01:36 | grab your mouse and move it to the
right location in the iTunes window.
| | 01:39 | So just remember this list is available
by going to the Help menu and choosing
| | 01:42 | Keyboard Shortcuts and then take some
time to look through the list and learn
| | 01:47 | the shortcuts that you think
will be most useful to you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Importing MediaUnderstanding file formats| 00:00 | In this chapter of movies we're going
to look at the many ways to import music
| | 00:03 | and other content into your iTunes library.
| | 00:06 | So first of all I've gotten to rid of
all the songs I imported in the previous
| | 00:08 | chapter when I needed some examples
to demonstrate the iTunes interface.
| | 00:12 | So we're going to start with a clean
blank iTunes library in this chapter, but
| | 00:16 | if you have music in your
library already, don't worry about it.
| | 00:18 | Now in the movie following this one,
I'm going to talk about importing
| | 00:21 | music from audio CDs.
| | 00:23 | When you import songs from a CD into
your library, that song is encoded by
| | 00:26 | iTunes into a file, and that
file is stored on your hard drive.
| | 00:30 | The amount of space that file takes up
depends on the length of the song and the
| | 00:33 | encoding settings you used when you imported it.
| | 00:36 | And the encoding settings you use are
also going to affect the audio quality of
| | 00:39 | the particular song.
| | 00:40 | Generally, larger files are going
to sound better than smaller files.
| | 00:43 | Let's go into iTunes > Preferences.
| | 00:46 | If you're on Windows, you go into the
Edit menu and choose Preferences, and
| | 00:49 | here into the General section, we're going to
look at the area near the bottom of the window.
| | 00:53 | Now in the previous chapter, we looked
at the menu where you can determine what
| | 00:56 | happens when you insert a CD into
your computer, whether you want iTunes to
| | 00:59 | automatically start importing to
CD or ask you to do so and so on.
| | 01:03 | We also have this checkbox here called
Automatically retrieve CD track names
| | 01:07 | from Internet, which is on by default.
| | 01:10 | And that basically means that when you
insert an audio CD, iTunes will connect
| | 01:13 | to an online database and try to
determine what CD you've just inserted and
| | 01:17 | then list the track names instead of
just giving you a generic list of names,
| | 01:20 | like track 1, and track 2, and so on.
| | 01:22 | So you probably want to keep that
option checked to save yourself the hassle of
| | 01:26 | manually typing track info
in each time you import a CD.
| | 01:29 | iTunes won't always recognize every CD,
and it does occasionally misidentify CDs,
| | 01:34 | but it gets it right most of the time
and you can manually make any necessary
| | 01:37 | changes or corrections, but what I
really want to talk about in this movie are
| | 01:40 | the import settings.
| | 01:42 | And at the top of this window that
opens you'll find the Import Using menu.
| | 01:46 | And these are the encoding options
that are built into iTunes 10, and you'll
| | 01:50 | find the same options on both Mac and Windows.
| | 01:52 | Basically, these encoders are
different ways for iTunes to convert music into
| | 01:56 | files to store on your computer.
| | 01:58 | Now, by far, the most well known
type of encoder is the MP3 encoder.
| | 02:03 | The term MP3 is pretty much synonymous
with digital music, regardless of whether
| | 02:07 | the file is actually an MP3 or not.
| | 02:10 | MP3 was the codec that made it possible
to take a sound file and compress it down
| | 02:13 | to a small transferable file size
while maintaining decent audio quality.
| | 02:18 | So many people are still encoding music
as MP3s these days, but you probably saw
| | 02:22 | that the default encoder in
iTunes is the AAC Encoder.
| | 02:26 | AAC files generally sound as good or
better than MP3 files that are encoded at
| | 02:30 | the same or even higher bit rate.
| | 02:32 | Now, when I talk about bit rate,
I'm referring to this Setting menu here.
| | 02:37 | The default setting for the AAC
encoder is iTunes Plus, which is 128 kilobits
| | 02:41 | per second for mono recordings, and 256
kilobits per second for stereo recordings.
| | 02:46 | All that means is that every second of
music either takes up 128 or 256 kilobits
| | 02:51 | of hard drive space, depending on
whether that audio track is in mono or stereo.
| | 02:56 | Most recordings are in stereo these days,
so you're most likely looking at 256
| | 03:00 | kilobits for files encoded with these settings.
| | 03:02 | Now, you can also choose High Quality,
which drops the settings down to 128 kilobits
| | 03:07 | per second for stereo recordings,
and there is also a Spoken Podcast
| | 03:11 | setting which is optimized for audio
tracks which don't involve music, but
| | 03:14 | rather spoken word recordings.
| | 03:16 | And you can also choose Customize, if
you want to take that Stereo Bit Rate as
| | 03:20 | high as 320 kilobits per second,
but if you are like most people, you're
| | 03:24 | probably not going to be able to hear
the difference between anything encoded at
| | 03:27 | around say 192 kilobits per
second and anything higher than that.
| | 03:30 | Now, if you can hear the difference
and don't mind larger file sizes, by all
| | 03:34 | means choose a high bit rate for your
encoding, but most people won't need to
| | 03:38 | make any changes in here.
| | 03:40 | Now, the MP3 Encoder is set to a
default setting of High Quality 160 kilobits
| | 03:46 | per second, but most people seem to
agree that even though this produces a
| | 03:49 | larger file than an AAC file that's set
to a high quality of 128 kilobits per
| | 03:54 | second, the smaller AAC file will sound better.
| | 03:57 | Ultimately, you're going to have to
be the final judge as to which encoder
| | 04:00 | sounds better to you.
| | 04:01 | You might want to experiment with
encoding one MP3 and one AAC version of the
| | 04:05 | same song and see if you
can tell the difference.
| | 04:08 | If you can't, you might want
to go with the smaller file.
| | 04:10 | Now we do have a couple
other import options here.
| | 04:14 | We have the AIFF Encoder and the WAV
Encoder, and these two are similar in that
| | 04:18 | they don't apply any
compression to the audio files.
| | 04:20 | They produce a very high quality
sounding files that are usually several times
| | 04:24 | larger than AAC or MP3 files, and they
generally take up about 10 megabytes of
| | 04:29 | space per minute of music.
| | 04:31 | So where an AAC or MP3 file might
take-up say 3 to 4 megabytes of space and
| | 04:36 | AIFF file or a WAV file might
take-up to 10 megabytes of space.
| | 04:40 | The fifth encoding option we have
here is the Apple Lossless Encoder.
| | 04:44 | This encoder is going to give you a
very close to the same quality as the AIFF
| | 04:48 | and WAV Encoders, but at
about half the file size.
| | 04:51 | So Apple Lossless files are still going
to be larger than AAC or MP3 files, but
| | 04:56 | they'll sound better than AAC and MP3
files, without taking up as much space as
| | 04:59 | the AIFF or WAV files.
| | 05:02 | If you plan on burning a high
quality audio disc of the songs you're
| | 05:04 | importing, you should use either the
Lossless Encoder or the AIFF Encoder for
| | 05:08 | the best sounding results.
| | 05:10 | Just remember that the Lossless Encoder
takes up less space, so unless you can
| | 05:14 | here the difference between the AIFF
and the Lossless, go with Lossless.
| | 05:18 | Now, the WAV Encoder would work as
well too, but that's more for Windows
| | 05:21 | computers that aren't using iTunes or
computers that don't have MP3 playing software.
| | 05:25 | So you generally don't need to use the
WAV Encoder even if you're on Windows,
| | 05:28 | since you're already using iTunes.
| | 05:31 | Now, if your primary purpose of
importing music and audio files into your
| | 05:33 | computer is just to play that music on
the computer itself, or on your iPod, or
| | 05:38 | to other computers on your network, you
should definitely choose either MP3 or
| | 05:41 | AAC as your default encoder.
| | 05:43 | I suggest AAC because I think it
sounds better, but if you're going to be
| | 05:47 | trading files with other users who
don't use iTunes, or maybe embedding audio
| | 05:52 | files into a website that you're
designing, you might want to pick MP3, since
| | 05:55 | AAC is not as widely supported
outside of iTunes as MP3s are.
| | 06:00 | So basically, whatever encoder you
choose here, that's what we'll apply the next
| | 06:03 | time you import a CD, but you can
always come back in here to preferences to
| | 06:07 | change your settings
before you import content too.
| | 06:10 | So nothing is set in stone here.
| | 06:11 | What you should try to avoid though is
importing a song as say an AAC file and
| | 06:16 | then when you find your need one of
those AAC files as an MP3, you then convert
| | 06:20 | the AAC into an MP3. Because you
essentially will be compressing an already
| | 06:24 | compressed file and
degrading the overall quality.
| | 06:27 | You should always try to encode your
files from the original source if you can.
| | 06:30 | So if you do end up needing an MP3
version of a song you took off a CD, put that
| | 06:34 | CD back in and import the
file as an MP3 fresh from the CD.
| | 06:39 | All right, so I'm going to leave my
encoder set to AAC Encoder and the
| | 06:41 | setting to iTunes Plus.
| | 06:44 | Now, we also have a checkbox in here that
turns on error correction when reading Audio CDs.
| | 06:48 | Basically, if the CD you're importing is
in poor shape, maybe it's scratched up,
| | 06:52 | that might introduce errors
into the file you're importing.
| | 06:54 | You can check this box to let iTunes
take its time in importing the files.
| | 06:58 | It might take longer to import the
songs, but it also might result in a
| | 07:02 | better sounding import.
| | 07:03 | So check this box if you're having
trouble importing certain tracks.
| | 07:06 | I'm just going to uncheck mine again.
| | 07:08 | Finally, just be aware that none of the
settings you select here apply to songs
| | 07:11 | you buy from the iTunes Store.
| | 07:13 | Those tracks have already been
compressed and optimized by Apple and you can't
| | 07:16 | change their encoding settings.
| | 07:18 | So these import settings are really
about the settings you're applying to music
| | 07:21 | you're importing from a CD or to files
that are already in your iTunes library
| | 07:25 | that you want to convert into another format.
| | 07:26 | All right, so I'll click OK.
| | 07:28 | Now, before we wrap this movie up, I want to
look at the Advanced section of our preferences.
| | 07:33 | And it's here where you'll find the
default location of where your iTunes music
| | 07:36 | and other media are stored.
| | 07:38 | So when I copy music off a CD and
import it onto my computer, I can see that
| | 07:42 | on my Mac it will go into my User
folder, into Music\iTunes, and a folder
| | 07:46 | called iTunes Media.
| | 07:47 | Let me show you what this looks like in Windows.
| | 07:51 | So here in Windows you can see that the
default location is the C drive\Users\my name\
| | 07:56 | Music\iTunes\iTunes Media.
| | 07:58 | Now, if want to store my iTunes
elsewhere, I'm free to click Change and select
| | 08:01 | another location, but I generally
recommend you leave that default location.
| | 08:06 | A little later I'll talk about
moving your library or adding additional
| | 08:09 | libraries, but for now I just need
to be aware of where iTunes is storing
| | 08:12 | your files by default.
| | 08:13 | You'll probably also want to make
sure you leave Keep iTunes Media
| | 08:16 | folder organized checked.
| | 08:18 | This automatically organizes your media
into artist and album folders, which can
| | 08:22 | also make it easier to copy
and backup your music manually.
| | 08:24 | We also have this option to Copy files to
the iTunes music folder when adding to library.
| | 08:29 | This doesn't apply to music you import
off a CD, which will go right into your
| | 08:33 | music folder location.
| | 08:34 | But if you have audio files that
maybe someone emailed to you or that you
| | 08:38 | copied off the web and that you want
to add into iTunes, with this option
| | 08:41 | checked iTunes will create a copy of
that file in your iTunes music folder when
| | 08:46 | you drag it in, and we'll talk more
about this in a couple of movies from now.
| | 08:49 | So those are the import options I
wanted to show you in regards to importing
| | 08:53 | music from a CD, which we'll take a
look at how to do in the very next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing from a CD| 00:00 | All right let's take a look at how
we import music from an audio CD into
| | 00:03 | our iTunes library.
| | 00:05 | Before we do so, I want to recommend
that before you insert a CD into your
| | 00:08 | computer you make sure you
are connected to the Internet.
| | 00:11 | As I previously mentioned, iTunes is
going to take look at the CD and connect to
| | 00:14 | the CDDB, the online CD database, and try
to figure out which CD you just inserted
| | 00:19 | into your computer and that way it will
automatically add the artist name, song
| | 00:23 | title, name of the album, and oftentimes
the genre and other information as well
| | 00:28 | and that way you don't have to
enter all that information manually.
| | 00:31 | If you're on a computer without an
Internet connection or if iTunes can't
| | 00:34 | find your CD's information, I'll
be showing you how to manually enter
| | 00:37 | information in the next movie.
| | 00:38 | Now for the purposes of this exercise,
I am going to go to iTunes > Preferences
| | 00:43 | or if you are in Windows, go to Edit >
Preferences and under General I'm going to
| | 00:48 | set my preferences where it says "When
you insert a CD," I'm going to set that to
| | 00:52 | Show CD and that will just display
the CD and all of its contents in iTunes
| | 00:56 | without automatically importing it.
| | 00:58 | You might want to set a different
preference here when you're importing your
| | 01:00 | own CDs, but in this case I just want
to talk a little bit about some options
| | 01:04 | before we actually import music.
| | 01:05 | I'm also going to make sure that
Automatically retrieve CD track names from
| | 01:08 | Internet is checked so iTunes will try to
identify the CD forming. I'll click OK.
| | 01:12 | All right so let's go ahead and insert a CD.
| | 01:15 | So you can see up here that iTunes is
accessing the Media Database, trying to
| | 01:21 | figure out what the CD is and now
we can see that iTunes has correctly
| | 01:25 | recognized the CD as "Goodnight
To Everyone" by The Jellybricks.
| | 01:28 | We can see the CD title appears here
under the Devices heading in the Source
| | 01:32 | pane and in the main portion of the
window, you can see the song titles, their
| | 01:35 | durations, the artists,
the album name and the genre.
| | 01:39 | You may see more or fewer categories
here as well depending on how you have
| | 01:42 | your preferences set.
| | 01:43 | Now, if I hadn't been connected to the
Internet all I would see here would be
| | 01:46 | track one, track two, track three, and
so on all the way down to track 10 and
| | 01:50 | there would be no other information
here except the duration of each track, and
| | 01:54 | then I would have to go in and
type all the information myself.
| | 01:57 | But for the most part, if you're
importing a major label artist's CD or even a
| | 02:01 | semi-popular independent artist,
chances are that iTunes will be able to grab
| | 02:05 | the correct information from the CDDB.
| | 02:07 | Even if you enter some really far
out lesser-known band, chances are that
| | 02:11 | someone out there has probably already
entered their album's info into the CDDB.
| | 02:15 | Now at this point I have
not yet imported the CD.
| | 02:18 | I can see the CD as a source under the
Devices heading and it has the CD icon
| | 02:22 | so you know it's a CD and I can play it
directly from here by clicking the Play
| | 02:26 | button or double-clicking a track, which is nice
if you just want to play a CD but not import it.
| | 02:31 | But in this case I do want to be able
to play this album without having to
| | 02:33 | insert it into my computer each
time so that's why we import our music.
| | 02:37 | So to import a CD just make sure it's
selected in the Source pane and then you
| | 02:41 | can click the Import CD button in the
lower right-hand corner of the window.
| | 02:45 | That will import every single track on the CD.
| | 02:47 | Now if you only want a few songs of a CD,
you just uncheck the ones you don't want.
| | 02:53 | Now a quick tip is if you hold down
the Command key on the Mac or Ctrl on
| | 02:56 | Windows and you click a checkbox you will
be able to uncheck every track all at once.
| | 03:01 | So if you only want say two tracks of a
30 track disc, you can Command+Click or
| | 03:04 | Ctrl+Click one of the checkboxes to
uncheck them all and then just click the
| | 03:08 | two tracks you want.
| | 03:09 | But for this example I want to keep
everything checked, so I am going to hold
| | 03:12 | down Command or Ctrl again to select them all.
| | 03:15 | Before you import, you also have easy
access to your import settings, which we
| | 03:20 | discussed in a previous movie, so if
you want to make any changes or just check
| | 03:23 | your encoding settings, you can do so here.
| | 03:25 | I'm going to leave mine set to the AAC
Encoder so I just cancel out of here and
| | 03:30 | now I click Import CD to import the CD
in its entirety, and you can see on the
| | 03:36 | top center display that it's importing
the song and this is just a good way to
| | 03:39 | keep track of the progress.
| | 03:42 | You can see here tracks that have been
imported have the green check mark next to them.
| | 03:46 | Tracks that are currently being
imported have this orange icon next to them.
| | 03:48 | Now if I select my music library, I
can see the songs that have already been
| | 03:52 | imported and the songs currently being
processed is here but also grayed out.
| | 03:57 | As soon as it appears un-grayed out,
that means it's available and I can start
| | 04:01 | playing it just by double-clicking it.
| | 04:01 | (Music Playing)
| | 04:06 | Now since I played a bit of the song,
the center display is now showing me
| | 04:09 | where I paused the song.
| | 04:11 | If I want to check on the progress of
my import, I can either select the CD in
| | 04:14 | my Source pane again, so I can
see the progress up here again.
| | 04:17 | Or if I'm still in my Music
Library and I play that song again,
| | 04:20 | (Music Playing)
| | 04:22 | I see this little triangle icon appear
and I can use that to toggle through the
| | 04:26 | display until I see the CD
import status appear again.
| | 04:29 | This is also where you can cancel
importing the CD by clicking this little X
| | 04:32 | button, which you can also do with
the CD selected in the Source pane.
| | 04:36 | You'll see we have stopped importing
down here in the lower right-hand corner
| | 04:39 | and that's nice in case you
accidentally click the Import CD button, which does
| | 04:43 | happen from time to time, at least to me.
| | 04:45 | So just let the CD continue to import.
| | 04:48 | The time it takes depends on the
length of your CD, your computer's
| | 04:51 | processing power, and the speed of your
disk drive, but iTunes will eventually
| | 04:54 | import the entire CD.
| | 04:56 | Another nice thing worth mentioning
here is that once iTunes has recognized the
| | 04:59 | CD track names and other info,
iTunes will automatically remember that
| | 05:03 | information the next time you insert
the CD and it won't try to connect to the
| | 05:06 | CDDB database again.
| | 05:08 | All right, and now that the import is
done I can eject the CD by clicking the
| | 05:13 | Eject button next to it in the Source pane.
| | 05:16 | You can also eject the CD using the
Eject button on your keyboard if you have
| | 05:19 | one or by ejecting it from the
finder like any other CD on your Mac.
| | 05:23 | If you're on Windows you can press the
Eject button on your CD drive on your computer.
| | 05:27 | So the CD has been ejected and iTunes
now displays my Music Library and here are
| | 05:30 | the songs I just imported.
| | 05:32 | Really it's very easy to do.
| | 05:34 | Just insert the CD and if you import
settings are the way you want them to be,
| | 05:37 | just click the Import CD button
and let iTunes do the rest.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Entering song info manually| 00:00 | Now I am going to show you how to
manually enter track information in case
| | 00:03 | either iTunes is unable to identify a
particular CD or if you don't have an
| | 00:07 | active Internet connection at
the time you import the CD tracks.
| | 00:10 | I am going to go to my iTunes >
Preferences, on Windows it would be Edit >
| | 00:13 | Preferences, and under General I am
going to uncheck Automatically retrieve CD
| | 00:18 | names from the Internet.
| | 00:19 | Now I want to stress that you don't
have to do this unless you just want to
| | 00:22 | follow along with what I am
doing with your own CD and enter some
| | 00:24 | information manually.
| | 00:26 | As I mentioned in the previous movie,
most of the time ITunes will be able to
| | 00:29 | correctly identify your CD, so you
won't have to type stuff in yourself.
| | 00:32 | So I am only unchecking this
for demonstration purposes.
| | 00:35 | Right, I'll click OK and now I am going to
insert another audio CD into my computer.
| | 00:40 | So you can see it just shows up with the
generic name of Audio CD and the tracks
| | 00:45 | are listed as Track 01, Track 02, Track
03 and so on, along with their durations.
| | 00:50 | No other information is
available from the CD itself.
| | 00:53 | Now there is nothing saying I can't
import the CD right now as-is. I have
| | 00:56 | complete access to the Import CD button
down here in the lower right-hand corner
| | 01:00 | and if I click it, each
track will be imported as usual.
| | 01:03 | But the problem is that every track
will come in with these generic names.
| | 01:06 | When I look at my library I won't be
able to tell who the artist is, what the
| | 01:09 | album name is, what the song titles are,
or any other useful information, and
| | 01:13 | I am sure I can manually enter the
information after I import the CD, but it
| | 01:17 | makes more sense to do it beforehand
because iTunes will then recognize the CD
| | 01:20 | the next time you insert it and you won't
have to manually enter the information again.
| | 01:23 | Now you are going to want to add, at
the very least, the artists, the album
| | 01:27 | name and song titles.
| | 01:29 | Now there are a couple of ways of doing this.
| | 01:31 | I could go through item by item.
For instance, I can click once to select
| | 01:34 | Track 01, pause a second, and then click it
again to select the text and then start typing.
| | 01:38 | Now that pause between clicks is
important because if you click too quickly,
| | 01:42 | iTunes will think you're double-
clicking and start playing the track.
| | 01:45 | So you click once, pause, then click
again and you can see the track name is now
| | 01:49 | highlighted and I could type
in the name of the first song.
| | 01:51 | Then I can come over to the
Artists area and enter that info.
| | 01:57 | I already have an album by the
Jellybricks in my Library, so iTunes is
| | 02:00 | suggesting that one.
| | 02:01 | If I agree with what it's suggesting,
I just press Return or Enter. Now I'll do
| | 02:05 | the same with album and that's
how you manually enter information.
| | 02:11 | I could do the same thing to Track 02.
I can even press the Tab key to jump to
| | 02:15 | the next spot, and since this is going
to be same artist I just need to type the
| | 02:18 | first couple letters, and I can
do the same thing with album again.
| | 02:23 | So you could just come through song
by song and manually enter all this
| | 02:26 | information, but that's a pretty slow and
tedious way to type in the info for an entire CD.
| | 02:30 | Another way we can do this is to select
a track and then right-click and choose
| | 02:36 | Get Info, or alternately,you can select
the Track and choose File > Get Info or
| | 02:42 | use the keyboard shortcut of Command+I
on the Mac or Ctrl +I on Windows, and
| | 02:46 | that's my preference is to just use the
keyboard command of Command+I. Any of
| | 02:50 | those methods opens this window
which you can see is divided into several
| | 02:53 | sections or tabs at the top
| | 02:55 | We'll be getting to each one of these
areas later but the one I am interested in
| | 02:58 | right now is Info, and in here I can
add the track information including
| | 03:02 | additional info that doesn't have
a column in the main iTunes window.
| | 03:05 | So I enter the name of the third song, and
just press Tab to move from field to field.
| | 03:11 | Again, iTunes is automatically
suggesting the artist for me so I can just press
| | 03:14 | Tab when I am happy with that.
The release year of this is 2004.
| | 03:18 | Just be careful not to press Enter
or Return while you are entering this
| | 03:21 | information or else iTunes will
think you are done and close this window.
| | 03:25 | Now you may be wondering what the
difference is between Artist and Album Artist.
| | 03:29 | Generally, anytime you are working with
an album by a single band or artist, you
| | 03:32 | only need to fill in the Artist field.
| | 03:35 | In cases where the album is maybe a
compilation like greatest hits of the 90s or
| | 03:38 | something like that, which might
include a dozen different artists, you'd put
| | 03:42 | the artist to perform the particular
track you've selected in the Artist field,
| | 03:45 | and then in the Album Artist field
you could just put the name of the album
| | 03:48 | itself or possibly the producer or
the compiler if it's someone of note.
| | 03:52 | Opinions vary on what the official
use of the Album Artist field is for.
| | 03:55 | But mostly it's there for situations
where it might not be clear who the artist
| | 03:59 | of the entire album is.
| | 04:00 | It's also useful if you have
two albums with the same name.
| | 04:03 | For example, there are ton of albums
in existence called Greatest Hits and if
| | 04:07 | you have more than one album with that
title, it's helpful to put that artist
| | 04:10 | name in both the Artist
field and the Album Artist field.
| | 04:12 | It can help iTunes keep better track
of the individual songs for each album,
| | 04:16 | especially if you like to view
your collection in Cover Flow view.
| | 04:19 | But again in a minimum, you should fill in
the Name, the Artist and the Album fields.
| | 04:24 | If it's classical music you might want
to put in the composer. You can put in
| | 04:28 | some of your own personal comments
and you can pick genres as well.
| | 04:30 | Let's just say this is Rock.
| | 04:33 | When you're done entering info for
the track, you don't have to leave this
| | 04:35 | window to go to the next track.
| | 04:37 | Just click Next and you can
see that takes me to Track 04.
| | 04:41 | So this is a little bit faster than
manually clicking each field one-by-one and
| | 04:44 | typing in all the info in
the main iTunes window here.
| | 04:46 | But since the CD contains tracks that
are off from a single artist and they all
| | 04:51 | obviously appear on the same album,
it makes sense that I should really only
| | 04:54 | have to type that info in once
and have it apply to all tracks.
| | 04:57 | Let me just cancel this for now.
| | 05:00 | So what I'll do in this case, since
my CD is selected, I'll press Command+A,
| | 05:04 | Ctrl+A on Windows to select all of
my tracks and then I use the keyboard
| | 05:08 | command, Command+I or Ctrl+I, and I do
see this warning asking me if I am sure I
| | 05:12 | want to edit information for multiple items?
| | 05:14 | I do so I'll click Yes.
| | 05:15 | So now we see this Multiple Item
Information window, which looks a little bit
| | 05:19 | different than the regular individual
Song Info window we were just looking at.
| | 05:22 | Notice there is no field here for
song title, since we have multiple track
| | 05:25 | selected. Instead we have fields that
relate to the entire album as a whole.
| | 05:29 | So we have Artist, Album Artist,
Album, Grouping, Composer and so on.
| | 05:33 | Many of the fields that we saw before.
| | 05:35 | So for Artist I'll type in the band name.
| | 05:37 | For the Year, I'll put in the year
again, and this is essentially going to
| | 05:40 | rewrite over the content that I
have already put in there before.
| | 05:43 | But it won't overwrite the
song names I've already entered.
| | 05:45 | Type the name of the album, and let's
just set a genre for all of them, and
| | 05:53 | those are the fields that I
want to add for now. I'll click OK.
| | 05:57 | You could see that global
information is now been added to each track.
| | 06:00 | Now I just need to add the song titles.
| | 06:02 | Now at this point it's definitely
easiest to select the first untitled track,
| | 06:06 | Get Info, add the song name, and
then click Next to go to the next song.
| | 06:14 | You can even use the keyboard
shortcut of Command+N or Ctrl+N for Next to
| | 06:19 | jump to the next track, without having
to take your hands off the keyboard to
| | 06:21 | click the Next button.
| | 06:25 | Notice it conveniently keeps the
field that you were working in selected.
| | 06:28 | So I'll just type the name of this
song, hit Command+N, and the next track, 07, is
| | 06:32 | selected so I can just start typing
right away without having to select or
| | 06:35 | delete any other text.
| | 06:37 | So I'll just finish adding
all of these song titles.
| | 06:39 | So now I have added all the important info
to the CD and I am finally ready to import.
| | 06:44 | Again, you could add this info to
untitled tracks after you import them but
| | 06:47 | adding it before you import ensures that
this info will automatically appear the
| | 06:50 | next time you insert the CD.
| | 06:52 | So with all the songs checked, I'll
click Import CD and now it's importing each
| | 06:57 | track with the proper
information already included.
| | 07:00 | Now I just let it do its thing, but I
do want to mention again that if you're
| | 07:03 | importing a popular album by a popular
artist, you most likely won't have to
| | 07:07 | manually enter this information.
| | 07:09 | But if you're importing an obscure album
by an obscure artist and the album info
| | 07:13 | doesn't appear even when you have
iTunes set to Automatically search for the
| | 07:16 | info, you will have to
enter this information by hand.
| | 07:19 | But then you can do your part so that
other people with iTunes and the same
| | 07:22 | album won't have to type
this albums info in by hand.
| | 07:25 | Once you've entered the album
information with the CD selected you can go to the
| | 07:29 | Advanced menu and choose Submit CD Track Names.
| | 07:33 | Now because I am currently
importing a CD I can't actually do this.
| | 07:36 | You can see it says Please stop
importing or wait for the import to complete
| | 07:39 | before attempting to Submit CD Track Names.
| | 07:41 | So I am just going to stop the
import, just so I can show you this.
| | 07:45 | So I go back to Advanced
> Submit CD Track Names.
| | 07:49 | Now in this CD Info window that pops up,
you have the opportunity to add any
| | 07:52 | other info that you might want to, and
when you are happy with it, you can click
| | 07:55 | OK to send this information to the CDDB.
| | 07:58 | The CDDB actually has a staff of people
who are constantly checking and fixing
| | 08:02 | song information that users send them
over the Internet, and once you've send this in,
| | 08:05 | then when some other iTunes user
inserts their copy of the CD into their
| | 08:09 | computer, the information they
receive from the CDDB might just be the
| | 08:12 | information you provided.
| | 08:14 | I am just going to Cancel this because
this album does already exists in the
| | 08:16 | CDDB, so we don't need to send it in
again, and that's how you manually enter CD
| | 08:21 | information into iTunes, and if you're
feeling like a nice person afterwards,
| | 08:24 | now you can upload the info
to save other people some time.
| | 08:27 | Now before we move onto the next movie I
am going to go back into my Preferences
| | 08:31 | and recheck Automatically retrieve CD
track names from the Internet, because I
| | 08:35 | always want iTunes to at least check
for the CD info before I have to start
| | 08:38 | typing it in myself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding and adding album artwork| 00:00 | One feature of digital music files
that's not essential but that most people
| | 00:03 | almost demand is the ability to
associate an album's artwork with the music file.
| | 00:08 | When digital music players like iTunes
and portable players like the iPod were
| | 00:12 | first becoming popular, many people
bemoaned the loss of the ability to sit and
| | 00:16 | look at the album's cover
while listening to the music.
| | 00:18 | So it only makes sense that Apple
added the feature in a previous version of
| | 00:21 | iTunes to add album artwork to your music files.
| | 00:24 | Now if you purchase your music from
the iTunes Store, you don't have to worry
| | 00:27 | about this, since album artwork is
always included in those files you purchase.
| | 00:31 | But if you're importing your music
from your own CDs or if you've downloaded
| | 00:34 | your music from elsewhere in the Internet,
the album artwork might not have been included.
| | 00:37 | Now if you are importing your own CDs,
you could scan the cover and turn it into
| | 00:42 | an image to add to your files, but if
it's a major label or popular album,
| | 00:46 | chances are that iTunes can find that
artwork for you and automatically add it
| | 00:49 | to your files, and even if they can't,
you might be able to find the artwork on
| | 00:53 | another website and
manually add it to your tracks.
| | 00:55 | We'll look at both options in this movie.
| | 00:58 | First of all, iTunes 10 has the
ability to examine your music library and
| | 01:01 | automatically add artwork for any
tracks that currently don't have artwork.
| | 01:04 | Now I've imported some more music
into my iTunes library for this example.
| | 01:09 | I can't offer any of this music as
Exercise Files, so you just have to use your
| | 01:12 | own music if you want to follow
along or just watch what I am doing.
| | 01:15 | I am going to switch over to the Grid
view and here you can see that some of my
| | 01:20 | albums have artwork. In fact most
of them do, but some others don't.
| | 01:23 | Now there are a couple of ways I can
have iTunes search for album artwork.
| | 01:27 | I can do it on an album by album
basis, in which case all I've to do is
| | 01:30 | right-click on one of the albums that's
missing artwork, and you can do this in
| | 01:34 | Song List, Album List and Cover Flow
views as well, but I find that the Grid
| | 01:37 | view we are looking at right now makes it
easier to see which albums are missing artwork.
| | 01:41 | So from this menu I would choose Get Album
Artwork, but watch what happened in this case.
| | 01:47 | So in order for iTunes to get the
artwork itself, you need to have an
| | 01:50 | iTunes Store account.
| | 01:51 | iTunes only searches the iTunes Store
for album artwork, which does introduce
| | 01:55 | other issues, but I'll be getting them
in a moment, and later on we'll take an
| | 01:58 | in-depth look at using iTunes
Store and creating an account.
| | 02:01 | For now I am just going to click OK and I am
going to select the iTunes Store and sign in.
| | 02:06 | I am just going to use an
existing account I already have.
| | 02:08 | Now that I am signed in, I'll go back
to my Music library, and I'll right-click
| | 02:19 | on that album once more
and choose Get Album Artwork.
| | 02:22 | Now you will see this dialog box asking
if you're sure you want to get album
| | 02:27 | artwork, and that information about songs
with missing artwork will be sent to Apple.
| | 02:30 | This is just Apple keeping track of
which songs people probably are not buying
| | 02:34 | on the iTunes Library.
| | 02:35 | But if you want to get the artwork
this way, you have to click Get Album
| | 02:37 | Artwork, so I'll go ahead and click that,
and just like that there is the album cover.
| | 02:42 | Now if I double-click the album here
in Grid View I can see the artwork image
| | 02:45 | has been added to each track in this album.
| | 02:47 | So each one I select has
that artwork appearing there.
| | 02:49 | I am going to go back to All Albums.
| | 02:53 | So this is super easy to do if you have
an iTunes account and the album you are
| | 02:56 | adding the artwork to is
available on the iTunes Store.
| | 02:59 | If you want iTunes to try to add
artwork for all the other albums with
| | 03:02 | missing artwork, just press Command+
A on the Mac or Ctrl+A on Windows to
| | 03:06 | select all of your albums and then right-click
on any one of them and choose Get Album Artwork.
| | 03:11 | Again I'll say Get Album Artwork and
then iTunes will go through your entire
| | 03:16 | library and attempt to add artwork
to each album that's missing artwork.
| | 03:20 | Now if you do have tracks that
already have artwork, iTunes will not
| | 03:23 | overwrite those tracks.
| | 03:25 | So I can see that it couldn't get the
artwork for some albums, I can see which
| | 03:27 | one it couldn't find.
| | 03:28 | So I'll go ahead and click on OK.
| | 03:33 | So again, this is a cool and fast way
to get album artwork but the limitation
| | 03:36 | is that iTunes can only find artwork for
albums that are sold on the iTunes Music Store.
| | 03:42 | And as we just saw there for example,
my two Beatles album still don't have artwork.
| | 03:46 | So if I want to have artwork with these
albums, I am going to have to add them manually.
| | 03:50 | Again, if you have a scanner, you could
go through the trouble of scanning your
| | 03:52 | CD covers, but it's much easier to go
out online and find the cover elsewhere.
| | 03:56 | Two great resources are
amazon.com and allmusic.com.
| | 04:00 | Between those two web sites you should
be able to find nearly every album cover
| | 04:03 | you are looking for.
| | 04:04 | So I go over to amazon.com and in here,
I am just going to do a search for my
| | 04:11 | first Beatles album that I have here
which is called Abbey Road and the version
| | 04:17 | I have is the 1990 release of the CD,
so I'll click that. You could see the
| | 04:21 | album cover right there.
| | 04:22 | All right, so what I am going to here, just
make my iTunes window a little bit smaller.
| | 04:28 | With Abbey Road selected here in my
iTunes window, I am going to open up the
| | 04:30 | Info pane by clicking this button
right here in lower left-hand corner of the
| | 04:34 | iTunes window and you can see it
says Selected Item, Drag Artwork Here.
| | 04:38 | That's exactly what I am going to do.
| | 04:40 | So I can click on see larger image in
most cases here in Amazon, you get the
| | 04:45 | largest version of the CD cover that's
available, and just drag that right into
| | 04:49 | iTunes and there it is.
| | 04:52 | You could see that the cover art
has now been added to this album.
| | 04:54 | I'll do the same thing with Revolver.
Again with it selected, I see Drag
| | 04:59 | Artwork Here. So I come back into my
browser, do a search for revolver, let's
| | 05:06 | do it in music so we aren't actually
finding actual revolvers, and again find
| | 05:11 | the UK version here.
| | 05:12 | There is the cover and again,I'll just
drag that into iTunes and there it is.
| | 05:19 | So you can see my two Beatles albums
now have their proper covers associated
| | 05:25 | with them, and you're not limited to
just adding a single album cover or piece
| | 05:29 | of artwork onto your files.
| | 05:30 | For instance, I just noticed here on
the Amazon page, someone has submitted the
| | 05:35 | back cover of the Revolver album.
| | 05:37 | So I click on that and maybe I want to have
this back cover associated with my files here.
| | 05:45 | So with Revolver still selected here in
iTunes, I am just going to drag the back
| | 05:50 | cover into that same area and you can
see that it's now been added, and notice I
| | 05:54 | can now use these arrows to
page through the artwork for this album.
| | 05:58 | In fact if I double-click to open up
Revolver, I am going to select the first
| | 06:02 | file here, right-click on it, choose Get Info.
| | 06:05 | Here in the Artwork tab, you can see I
have two pieces of artwork for this file.
| | 06:09 | If I click Next, you can see that both
pieces of artwork have in fact been added
| | 06:14 | to each file. Pretty cool.
| | 06:18 | So you can drag in as many images into
a song file as you like, but do bear in
| | 06:21 | mind that this does add to the overall
file size of each file, and that devices
| | 06:25 | like the iPod can only display the main image.
| | 06:28 | So if you are copying your music over
to your iPod you are basically wasting
| | 06:30 | space by storing images that you'll
never see in the files, unless you do want
| | 06:34 | to just look at them in iTunes.
| | 06:35 | But in any case that's how you add
artwork to your music files in iTunes, both
| | 06:39 | automatically and manually.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding lyrics to songs| 00:00 | In addition to cover artwork another
aspect of traditional music media that
| | 00:04 | originally got lost in the digital
revolution was the ability to read the
| | 00:08 | lyrics to the songs you are listening to.
| | 00:10 | Well, much like with adding Artwork
to your music files in iTunes, you can
| | 00:13 | also add the lyrics and again this
is not a requirement of creating music
| | 00:17 | files and it does add a little bit to
the overall file size of your files, but
| | 00:20 | there are many people, possibly
yourself included, who like to read the lyrics
| | 00:23 | to songs as they are playing.
| | 00:25 | To add lyrics to a song just right-
click on a track, for instance More to Lose
| | 00:29 | by the Jellybricks here, and choose Get Info.
| | 00:31 | Now you've seen this window a couple
of times now and you can see there is a
| | 00:35 | section labeled Lyrics, and all this
really is,is a text box where you can
| | 00:39 | enter the lyrics for a
particular song you selected.
| | 00:42 | But where do you get the lyrics?
| | 00:43 | It could be as basic as typing them
in by hand yourself but unless you're
| | 00:47 | dealing with an incredibly obscure song,
chances are you'll be able to find the
| | 00:50 | lyrics online somewhere.
| | 00:51 | So for example I go out to my web browser
and there are a couple of things you can do.
| | 00:55 | Many bands and artists offer the
lyrics to their songs on their web sites.
| | 00:59 | So that might be the best place to start to
make sure you get the most accurate lyrics.
| | 01:02 | So for example, I go to the
jellybricks.com and on this web site we go into
| | 01:07 | music, I find the album, and if I
scroll down I'll find the lyrics for the song
| | 01:14 | I had selected, "More to Lose."
| | 01:15 | You probably have to hunt around on
whichever artist or band's website you are
| | 01:19 | on to find their lyrics
if they in fact have them.
| | 01:21 | So all I am going to do here is just
select the text, copy it, and then go back
| | 01:27 | to iTunes and paste them in,
and that's all there is to it.
| | 01:32 | All I really did here was just
paste text in that I had copied.
| | 01:35 | If you want to do a little bit more
formatting, for instance if you don't like
| | 01:38 | how the lyrics are divided by slashes,
I could just delete those and just hit
| | 01:41 | Return to add some paragraph breaks in
here, or whatever you want to do to the
| | 01:46 | text to make it easier to
read. Then just click OK.
| | 01:48 | Now if the band who sung you are
trying to find lyrics for hasn't posted
| | 01:53 | the lyrics on their web site, there are
tons of lyric sites out there on the Internet.
| | 01:57 | The easiest thing is usually to type
the name of the band, the name of the song,
| | 02:00 | and the word lyrics into
Google or some other search engine.
| | 02:02 | So for example, I'll type Jellybricks,
name of the song I am looking for we will
| | 02:08 | say is "Ruin Us," and I will type the
word lyrics, and you can see several
| | 02:13 | options show up here.
| | 02:18 | Usually you have to get rid of annoying
things like this, just close that, but
| | 02:23 | here we can see the lyrics are
here on this third party web site.
| | 02:26 | Now when you're dealing with these
third-party lyric sites, there is no
| | 02:28 | guarantee that the lyrics
are going to be 100% accurate.
| | 02:31 | So you might want to read through
them before you paste them into iTunes.
| | 02:33 | Of course you might be looking for
lyrics specifically because you don't
| | 02:36 | know what they are.
| | 02:37 | So you might want to look for a
couple of different versions of the song's
| | 02:39 | lyrics to see if they match.
| | 02:41 | But I'll just assume these are correct,
select, Copy, go back into iTunes, find
| | 02:50 | the song, right-click on it to get info, and
then in lyrics here I'll paste, and there they are.
| | 02:58 | Now in iTunes the only way to view the
lyrics you've entered is to bring up the
| | 03:03 | track's Info window that we see here.
| | 03:05 | Some iPod models have the ability
to display the lyrics you've added to
| | 03:07 | your song file though.
| | 03:08 | So if you'd like to read the words as
you listen to your music, you can do
| | 03:12 | some hunting around and spend the time to paste
the lyrics for each song into their Info window.
| | 03:16 | One other thing to mention about adding
lyrics is that you cannot add lyrics to WAV files.
| | 03:21 | If you recall, earlier we discussed
the different encoding settings that are
| | 03:24 | available in iTunes, which you can find
by going to iTunes > Preferences or Edit
| | 03:27 | > Preferences on Windows, and under
the General heading if you go to Import
| | 03:31 | Settings this is where you'll
find your different import options.
| | 03:34 | When you add lyrics to a song file,
you've basically just added additional code
| | 03:37 | to that file, but WAV files
don't support this ability.
| | 03:41 | So don't use this format if
you plan on adding lyrics.
| | 03:44 | But most likely you'll be using the MP3
or the AAC encoders anyway, if you are
| | 03:48 | planning on putting your music on your iPod.
| | 03:49 | So that's all there is to it, and now
in addition to listening to your music,
| | 03:56 | you can also look at the album artwork
as well as read the lyrics once you enter
| | 03:59 | that information here in iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Dragging in song files| 00:00 | In addition to importing music off
audio CDs another way to get music into
| | 00:04 | iTunes is to simply drag music files in.
| | 00:07 | This is useful to know if someone
emails you an audio file or maybe you've
| | 00:10 | downloaded an audio file from another
web site or music selling service and you
| | 00:14 | want to add it to your iTunes library.
| | 00:15 | So in this movie I would like to
show you how to drag files into iTunes.
| | 00:18 | Now before I do this, let's go back to
iTunes > Preferences and again if you're
| | 00:22 | on Windows it will be Edit >
Preferences, and under the Advanced section I want
| | 00:26 | to make sure that both Keep iTunes
Media folder organized and Copy files to
| | 00:30 | iTunes Media folder when adding to
library are both checked, and we're going to
| | 00:33 | see the significance of this in just a moment.
| | 00:35 | I have copied to my desktop a folder
called import from the Exercise Files
| | 00:39 | folder and in this folder our five
audio file I want to my iTunes library.
| | 00:44 | To do so, I just select them all I can
hit Command+A or Ctrl+A on Windows and I
| | 00:49 | can drag them either into the main
iTunes Music area here or into my Library,
| | 00:53 | either way. You see that Plus symbol
indicating that I'm going to be copying
| | 00:56 | these files into iTunes.
| | 00:59 | You might have seen just for a split
second there that the center display said
| | 01:01 | it was copying those file files over.
| | 01:03 | And the reason it's copping those
files is specifically because I had that
| | 01:06 | option checked in Preferences,
Copy files to iTunes Media folder.
| | 01:11 | If I didn't have that checked iTunes
would still have added them to my Library
| | 01:14 | so I could play them, but the actual
files would have remained where they are in
| | 01:18 | the import folder here on my desktop.
| | 01:21 | But that's really not the
best way to manage your music.
| | 01:23 | It's better to keep all of your files
organized so that's why you should keep
| | 01:26 | this Copy files to iTunes
Media folder option checked.
| | 01:29 | That way all of your
files will be in one location.
| | 01:33 | So at this point, I could actually just
delete the files in the Import folder on
| | 01:36 | my desktop because iTunes has now
created a copy of the files in my Library.
| | 01:41 | To see where iTunes placed this music,
I can right-click on one of the files that
| | 01:44 | I just imported, for instance,
this song called More To Lose.
| | 01:46 | I will right-click on that and I'll
choose Show in Finder here on my Mac.
| | 01:50 | If you're on Windows you would choose
Show in Windows Explorer and that actually
| | 01:54 | opens a folder on my
computer containing the files.
| | 01:56 | Let me just show you this in Windows.
| | 01:59 | So here in Windows I again right-click on
a file, choose Show in Windows Explorer.
| | 02:05 | There is the file. Now, here in
Windows you can see the path to the file right
| | 02:08 | here at the top of the window.
| | 02:09 | So you can see More To Lose is located
in a folder called Goodnight To Everyone,
| | 02:14 | The Jellybricks, Music, and I can go
back even further and see the path all the
| | 02:18 | way back to the C drive.
| | 02:19 | Now here on the Mac you can reveal the
path to the folder by holding down the
| | 02:23 | Command key and clicking the
folder's name at the top of the window.
| | 02:26 | So you can see that this again is in
the folder called Goodnight To Everyone,
| | 02:30 | inside The Jellybricks > Music > iTunes
Music > iTunes > Music and then all the
| | 02:34 | way back to my home folder.
| | 02:35 | So this is exactly the path that's
indicated under my iTunes music folder
| | 02:40 | location preferences here in iTunes,
/Users/garrick/Music/iTunes/iTunes Music.
| | 02:45 | So iTunes copied those file over and
organized them into their proper folders.
| | 02:49 | Now if I go out to my Finder and let's
just follow the path straight for my home
| | 02:53 | folder here, my Home folder, Music >
iTunes > iTunes Music > Music >
| | 03:00 | The Jellybricks > Goodnight To Everyone
and there's that file, More To Lose.
| | 03:06 | So iTunes created this entire folder
structure for me based on the information
| | 03:09 | included in the files I dragged in.
| | 03:11 | All I had to do is drag in the files.
| | 03:14 | Now but I do have some issues here, here
in iTunes you can see that More To Lose
| | 03:18 | is by The Jellybricks but I also
have entries for songs by Jellybrick and
| | 03:22 | Jellybricks, but the
band's name is The Jellybricks.
| | 03:26 | Now there is even a track called Track 09,
which is one of The Jellybricks songs
| | 03:32 | I dragged in but it has no information
tagged to it, so it's been dumped to the
| | 03:35 | bottom of my library.
| | 03:37 | If I show that file in my Finder you
can see that it's in a folder called
| | 03:40 | Unknown Album, which is in a
folder called Unknown Artist.
| | 03:43 | This is where iTunes will place any
track that contains no information about the
| | 03:47 | artist or album it comes from.
| | 03:49 | So I need to change some of the info
in these tracks to make them consistent.
| | 03:53 | Especially if you browse for music
based on the artist name, you don't want to
| | 03:56 | have multiple variations of
the name to search through.
| | 03:58 | So now you're going to see why it's
important to keep that Keep iTunes music
| | 04:01 | folder organized preference checked.
| | 04:02 | So let me go back to the listing of
music folders here in my Finder and you can
| | 04:12 | see here we have Jellybrick and Jellybricks.
| | 04:14 | We just move this over here where we
can see it and I'll go back to iTunes.
| | 04:18 | So keep your eye on Jellybrick here.
| | 04:20 | We'll go back and find songs.
| | 04:24 | So here I'm going to change the artist
for the song Goodnight To Everyone from
| | 04:30 | Jellybrick to The Jellybricks, and
watch what happens over here in the Finder
| | 04:36 | when I press Return.
| | 04:37 | You see the Jellybrick, the
folder, completely disappeared.
| | 04:41 | Now if I go and look in the folder The
Jellybricks, I'll find that file sitting
| | 04:47 | in Unknown Album, because if you
look over here in iTunes, the album name
| | 04:54 | Goodnight To Everyone is still unknown.
| | 04:56 | So now I'll change that to Goodnight
To Everyone, which is the title track.
| | 05:02 | Notice that Unknown Album has now
disappeared and if I look into Goodnight To
| | 05:05 | Everyone there is the actual song.
| | 05:08 | So iTunes handles all this
organizational stuff for you in the background.
| | 05:11 | All you have to do is make your
changes in the iTunes interface and iTunes
| | 05:14 | will handle the rest.
| | 05:15 | So let's fix these other songs.
| | 05:19 | Both Ruin Us and Broken Record,
these both also have to be changed to The
| | 05:23 | Jellybricks and again we'll look in
here in, Goodnight To Everyone, and you can
| | 05:31 | see those songs now been added here as well.
| | 05:34 | Finally, let's fix that track number
nine. This is actually a song called "Up To You"
| | 05:39 | and again, we'll add artist here.
| | 05:46 | Now because I change the artist and
everything we're looking at in this view is
| | 05:49 | an alphabetical order by artist, we'll
go back and find the song, there it is,
| | 05:54 | and lastly we'll just add the
album name, and there it is.
| | 06:02 | And again, if I look at in my Finder
inside Goodnight To Everyone, Up To You is
| | 06:05 | now been added to it.
| | 06:08 | So those are just some things to keep
in mind and to know about when you drag
| | 06:11 | in files into iTunes.
| | 06:13 | They're not always going to be as
poorly named and tagged as these files were
| | 06:15 | here, these are probably some extreme
examples, but depending on where you're
| | 06:19 | getting your music from sometimes you will
get files that are completely named wrong.
| | 06:22 | But it's good to know that as long as
you tell iTunes to keep things organized
| | 06:25 | for you, all you have to do is edit
things here in the iTunes interface and
| | 06:28 | iTunes will handle all the
background organizational stuff for you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Converting single files| 00:00 | Occasionally, you may need to convert
an audio file from one format to another.
| | 00:05 | For example, if you ripped an
uncompressed AIFF version of a song from a CD, that
| | 00:09 | file is probably too large to send
attached to an email to a friend.
| | 00:12 | So you may want to convert
it to an AAC or MP3 file.
| | 00:16 | We saw at the beginning of this
chapter that you can go to iTunes > Preferences
| | 00:20 | or Edit > Preference on Windows and under
the General section, you can select the
| | 00:24 | encoder you want to apply to the music you
take off of your CDs by clicking Import Settings.
| | 00:29 | These settings also apply to any
individual tracks already in your library that
| | 00:33 | you may want to convert.
| | 00:34 | Maybe for instance I'm in a band, and
I want to submit one of my songs to a
| | 00:38 | talent agency's web site.
| | 00:39 | All of my songs are encoded as AACs
and the website requires me to send MP3s.
| | 00:45 | No problem. I just go into my
preferences here and I can change my
| | 00:48 | import setting to MP3.
| | 00:52 | Now as a general rule, you should
probably avoid converting an AAC into an MP3
| | 00:56 | or vice versa, if you want to
maintain the highest sound fidelity.
| | 00:59 | When you compress an already compressed audio
file, you're bound to lose a bit of quality.
| | 01:04 | Chances are you might not be able to
tell the difference, but some people can.
| | 01:07 | Your best bet is to convert an
uncompressed file like an AIF or WAV file, or
| | 01:11 | even rip the song off the original
CD again if you have access to it.
| | 01:15 | But for this example I am just
going to convert an AAC file to an MP3.
| | 01:19 | To do so, just select the song, right
click on it, and choose Create MP3 Version.
| | 01:25 | What this menu item actually says
depends on what you have selected in
| | 01:28 | your import settings.
| | 01:29 | If I had selected the WAV encoder for
example, this menu would say Create WAV Version.
| | 01:34 | In any case all I have to do is select
my command, Create MP3 Version, and iTunes
| | 01:39 | creates this MP3 version, which is
now sitting right here in my library.
| | 01:42 | Now I have two versions of the same
song in a different format and I can't
| | 01:46 | necessarily tell which is which from
just looking at them in my library.
| | 01:49 | Instead, I am going to right-click and
choose Get Info, and under the Summary
| | 01:54 | section I can say that okay, this one
is an AAC audio file. If I click Next,
| | 01:59 | this is the one that's the MPEG or MP3 file.
| | 02:03 | And if I am going to email this
to someone, I find it easiest to then
| | 02:06 | right-click on the file, choose Show
in Finder, or in Windows, Show in Windows
| | 02:10 | Explorer, which reveals the file for me,
and from here I can grab the file and
| | 02:15 | drag it into my email application.
| | 02:17 | So that's how you can convert a single
file or multiple files, if you select
| | 02:21 | them all at once, into
another format here and iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Automatically Add to iTunes folder| 00:00 | iTunes 10 has a feature called the
Automatically Add to iTunes folder.
| | 00:04 | Basically it's a folder that iTunes
constantly watches while its running.
| | 00:08 | Any iTunes compatible audio or video
files you place into it, are automatically
| | 00:11 | added to your iTunes library.
| | 00:14 | In Windows, you will find this folder by
going to the Start menu, into your user
| | 00:17 | account folder, into My Music > iTunes
> iTunes Media and Automatically Add to
| | 00:25 | iTunes is found here.
| | 00:27 | On the Mac you will go into your home
folder, into Music > iTunes > iTunes Music,
| | 00:32 | it may be called iTunes Media, and
here you will find Automatically Add to iTunes.
| | 00:36 | So basically anything I place into
this folder will be examined by iTunes and
| | 00:41 | if it's compatible, iTunes will move it into
the appropriate folder in your iTunes library.
| | 00:45 | Now as you can see, this is an exactly
the most convenient folder to get to and
| | 00:49 | why would you want to drag files into
this folder to add in to iTunes, when you
| | 00:52 | can already drag files into
iTunes itself? Glad you asked.
| | 00:56 | If you spent much time surfing on the
web, you have probably downloaded your
| | 00:58 | share of audio and video files.
| | 01:00 | Now usually when you download files,
you end up cluttering up your desktop or
| | 01:03 | placing them into one mass Downloads
folder, and then when you drag those files
| | 01:07 | into iTunes, iTunes usually creates a
copy of those files, so you end up with
| | 01:11 | two copies of the same file on your computer.
| | 01:13 | So it makes sense to get organized and
have iTunes manage your music and video files.
| | 01:17 | I am just going to move this window
over here a little bit and I am going
| | 01:20 | to open up my browser.
| | 01:22 | So for this example, I am going to go
to thejellybricks.com, into music, and
| | 01:30 | here on this page is a link to
download an MP3 version of the song called
| | 01:33 | "We'll Be Together." Now depending on
your browser, clicking this link might
| | 01:37 | play the MP3 in the browser itself or it may
download the MP3 to your default Download folder.
| | 01:43 | In most cases though you can right
click on the link and choose something like
| | 01:46 | Download Linked File As.
| | 01:48 | Depending on your browser, it may say
Save Link As or Save Target As.
| | 01:51 | The exact name will depend on
which browser you're using.
| | 01:54 | But each browser should have a command
like this, that when clicked will let you
| | 01:57 | choose where you want to download that file to.
| | 01:59 | So I am going to save that to my home
folder > Music > iTunes > iTunes Music and
| | 02:05 | into the Automatically Add to iTunes folder.
| | 02:07 | Now, when I click Save, you should
see the file appear over here in the
| | 02:11 | Automatically Add to iTunes
Windows, since I have it open.
| | 02:13 | So I will click Save, here it comes,
and there it is, and watch what happens.
| | 02:19 | So, you saw that just after a
moment the file disappeared.
| | 02:22 | iTunes noticed that it was there
and moved it to the right place.
| | 02:25 | So if I switch over to iTunes and
look for The Jellybricks, so there it is
| | 02:30 | sitting in my iTunes library.
| | 02:32 | So now the file isn't just setting
somewhere else on my computer waiting for me
| | 02:35 | to manually drag it into iTunes,
and it also isn't just sitting in the
| | 02:38 | Automatically Add to
iTunes folder anymore either.
| | 02:41 | iTunes moved the file to the right place,
so I don't end up with two copies of
| | 02:44 | the same song on my computer.
| | 02:47 | But "not good enough," you say?
| | 02:48 | "It still takes up too much
time to navigate to that folder."
| | 02:51 | Oh, if you feel that's the case--
| | 02:52 | let me hide iTunes for a moment.
| | 02:56 | You can make an alias for this
Automatically Add to iTunes folder.
| | 02:59 | On the Mac, just right click on the
folder and choose Make Alias and you can
| | 03:05 | place that alias some place
convenient like on your desktop.
| | 03:09 | Now I can easily drag or save files
into this alias folder and it will pop right
| | 03:13 | into the real
Automatically Add to iTunes folder.
| | 03:16 | And you can do the same thing on
Windows. Just right click on the folder and
| | 03:20 | choose Create shortcut, which is the
same thing as creating an alias, and just
| | 03:24 | drag that to your desktop.
| | 03:26 | Now it's very important that you do
use an alias or create a shortcut and not
| | 03:30 | move the original folder to any other location.
| | 03:32 | If you move the original folder from
its original location, iTunes will no
| | 03:36 | longer be able to keep track of it.
| | 03:37 | Now, a couple of more things to know
about this Automatically Add to iTunes folder.
| | 03:41 | First of all, it only
works when iTunes is running.
| | 03:44 | If you add files to this folder while
iTunes isn't running, they will just sit
| | 03:47 | in there and tell the next time you
start iTunes and then iTunes will notice the
| | 03:50 | files and organize them.
| | 03:51 | Also if you put anything into this
folder that iTunes doesn't recognize or can't play,
| | 03:55 | like if you place a photo in
here or an incompatible movie file, iTunes
| | 03:59 | will create a folder called Not Added.
| | 04:01 | Let me show you how that works.
| | 04:02 | Let's just grab this piece of artwork
here and I am going to drag that to my alias.
| | 04:06 | And I can see that ends up in the
Automatically Add to iTunes folder, and after
| | 04:12 | a second it disappears and now this Not
Added folder has appeared and if I look
| | 04:16 | in that, there's today's date
and time and there is the file.
| | 04:20 | So iTunes will automatically place
files that it can't read or play into this
| | 04:24 | Not Added folder and it will organize
them into dates for you, so you can easily
| | 04:27 | keep track of when you added these files.
| | 04:30 | Now also bear in mind that iTunes will
never delete files from the Not Added
| | 04:33 | folder, so you might want to check in
here from time to time to see if anything
| | 04:36 | is sitting in here that you might
want to move or delete yourself.
| | 04:39 | Also, and this is for Windows users only,
if you place a WMA audio file into the
| | 04:44 | Automatically Add to iTunes folder, it
will convert it to an iTunes compatible
| | 04:47 | format and move the original
WMA file to the Not Added folder.
| | 04:51 | So you will end up with a version of the song
in iTunes on Windows, just not the WMA version.
| | 04:56 | So just be aware that if you use WMA files.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Joining tracks| 00:00 | Occasionally, you'll come across an
album of music in which the artist creates a
| | 00:03 | seamless transition between
individual tracks on the CD.
| | 00:07 | Some examples that come to mind are
the second half of Abbey Road by the
| | 00:10 | Beatles, in which one song flows directly
into the next, or on their Sgt. Sergeant Pepper album
| | 00:14 | where "Sgt. Pepper's Lonely Hearts Club Band"
transitions directly into the song "With a
| | 00:18 | little help from my friends."
| | 00:20 | Pink Floyd's Dark Side of the Moon and
Green Day's American Idiot albums are
| | 00:24 | also examples of albums containing
songs that flow from one to another.
| | 00:27 | In any case there used to be an issue
with earlier versions of iTunes and older
| | 00:30 | models of iPods, that there would be a
small gap of silence between tracks, so
| | 00:34 | even if the artist intended for the
tracks to go from one to the next with no
| | 00:37 | break in between, the limited
technology would still introduce one.
| | 00:41 | Now that hasn't been a problem for a
while since a feature called gapless
| | 00:44 | playback was introduced back in
iTunes 7, and all iPods after the fifth
| | 00:48 | generation of iPods
support gapless playback as well.
| | 00:51 | But still it's useful to know that you
have the ability in iTunes to manually
| | 00:54 | join tracks together into
what amounts to a single file.
| | 00:57 | That ensures that no gap will be between the
tracks regardless of what device is playing them.
| | 01:02 | Another benefit of joining tracks
together is to make sure they always play
| | 01:05 | together even if you're shuffling songs
on random, or if you are a classical music
| | 01:09 | listener you might want to make sure
certain movements are always played
| | 01:12 | together and in order.
| | 01:13 | Now to join tracks together,
you have to join them from a CD.
| | 01:17 | You can't just pick two songs in
your iTunes library and join them.
| | 01:20 | Now as an example, I have inserted an
album by the Jellybricks called Kinky Boot Beast,
| | 01:24 | and let me play you the end of
one of these songs to show you how it
| | 01:27 | transitions into the next one.
| | 01:28 | (Music Playing)
| | 01:43 | So, that was a seamless
transition between those two tracks.
| | 01:45 | It went right from that thrumming
guitar sound at the end of Track 12, right
| | 01:49 | into the snare drum opening of Track 13.
| | 01:51 | And I want to make sure these tracks
stay together, because maybe the artist or
| | 01:55 | even I as a listener feel that they
really belong together when listening.
| | 01:58 | Maybe they are considered two halves
of a larger piece or something like that.
| | 02:01 | All I have to do is select those
two songs by holding down Shift and
| | 02:05 | clicking them both.
| | 02:06 | Now obviously this will only work
with contiguous songs on the CD. I can't
| | 02:10 | select say Track 1 and Track 7
and try to join those together.
| | 02:13 | So I am going to select Tracks 12 and 13
and with them selected I am going to
| | 02:17 | go to the Advanced menu
and choose Join CD Tracks.
| | 02:21 | Now these both songs are now
bracketed together and you will only see one
| | 02:25 | checkbox for both of them.
| | 02:26 | I am going to Command+Click that
checkbox to deselect everything, if you are on
| | 02:30 | Windows, it would be a Ctrl+Click,
and I'm only doing this because I just would
| | 02:33 | import these joined tracks for this example.
| | 02:35 | So I am just going to select that
one checkbox for the joined tracks.
| | 02:39 | So with that selected, I
am going to click Import CD.
| | 02:42 | Now we already have a copy of this
album in iTunes so iTunes knows this and is
| | 02:46 | asking me do you want to
replace these existing songs?
| | 02:48 | I am going to choose Don't Replace.
| | 02:50 | That will essentially give me a
copy of the individual songs plus the
| | 02:53 | joined version. And now you can see
it's importing "Who is God/Wasted Hours,"
| | 02:57 | the two individual songs.
| | 03:00 | And it's done. So I will go over to my
music library, and here in library, there is.
| | 03:04 | Notice that this title "Who is God -
Wasted Hours" and you can see the duration
| | 03:08 | is 7 minutes 20 seconds, which is the
combination of tracks 12 and 13 together.
| | 03:13 | And I will go ahead and play that and
I'll find that transition in here somewhere.
| | 03:16 | (Music playing)
| | 03:27 | So there it is.
| | 03:28 | A seamless transition.
| | 03:30 | So that's a way to make sure two songs that
were meant to play together, stay together.
| | 03:34 | Now of course the issue here is that
you have now combined these two songs
| | 03:36 | together, so if you really did just want
to listen to the second song, you would
| | 03:39 | have to manually jump to the
middle of this joined track.
| | 03:42 | Of course, another option is to create
a copy of that song by itself, so I may
| | 03:46 | try -- it didn't replace the existing
individual versions of those songs.
| | 03:49 | Now you might think that would defeat
the purpose of joining the tracks in the
| | 03:52 | first place, if your purpose was to
make sure the track doesn't come up on its
| | 03:55 | own if you're shuffling songs.
| | 03:57 | But what you can do is select that
individual song, choose Get Info by right
| | 04:01 | clicking on it, and under the Options
tab, you can check Skip when shuffling,
| | 04:06 | and you can see mine is already checked.
| | 04:08 | Now I can do the same for the first part of
that which is, "Who is God," Track 12 there.
| | 04:13 | I will choose Skip when shuffling,
click OK, and that way the individual
| | 04:18 | versions of the songs will never appear
when I shuffle my songs. Only the joined
| | 04:21 | version will be available for shuffle.
| | 04:23 | But I can always choose to manually
play the individual versions of either of
| | 04:25 | those tracks if I want to.
| | 04:26 | So, that's how we join CD tracks.
| | 04:28 | Now you may just want to go back and
select your CD again, choose those two
| | 04:32 | tracks, and under the Advanced menu, unjoin them.
| | 04:34 | Now that's not really necessary, but I
just wanted to make sure you knew that
| | 04:37 | command was in there.
| | 04:39 | So that's how we join CD tracks and
again just bear in mind that this only
| | 04:42 | works with contiguous
tracks you ripping off a CD.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing videos| 00:00 | So far we've been concentrating on
importing music in iTunes, but as we've
| | 00:04 | learned, iTunes also has the ability to
manage, organize, and play video files as well.
| | 00:09 | These could be TV shows, movies, music
videos, or podcasts you download from the
| | 00:13 | iTunes store, or they could be your own
video files that you yourself create or
| | 00:17 | download from other sources.
| | 00:19 | The only thing you have to bear in
mind is that the videos have to be in a
| | 00:21 | format that QuickTime can play,
like .movs, .m4vs or .mp4 movies.
| | 00:27 | Otherwise, importing a video is really
no different than importing an audio file.
| | 00:32 | On my desktop I have a folder called
videos that I copied from the excise files
| | 00:35 | folder and in here I have a
movie called SouthernUtah.
| | 00:38 | To add that to my iTunes
library, I just drag it in.
| | 00:41 | And it can be either dragged into the
main iTunes window or to the library.
| | 00:47 | Again, I have my preferences set to
copy files into my iTunes library, so
| | 00:50 | my songs and movies are all in one place,
instead of scattered around my hard drive.
| | 00:54 | So now I am going to select Movies in my
library, I see my movie has been placed there.
| | 00:58 | There is a blue dot next to it
indicating this is a movie I've not yet watched.
| | 01:02 | Double-clicking the movie plays it.
| | 01:04 | (Music Playing)
| | 01:18 | Let me just go ahead and pause that.
| | 01:19 | Now how and where the movie
playback is a matter of how you have
| | 01:22 | your preferences set.
| | 01:23 | As we are seeing here, the movie took
up the entire iTunes window with the
| | 01:27 | exception of the controls that
appears at the top of the window and just a
| | 01:30 | little bit of the bottom
of the window bar available.
| | 01:32 | Let's go look at our preferences.
| | 01:34 | I go to iTunes > Preferences, on
Windows it will be Edit > Preferences, and under
| | 01:38 | the Playback tab, you can use the Play
Movies and TV Shows menu to determine how
| | 01:43 | the movies are played back.
| | 01:44 | Currently it's set to "in the iTunes
window," but we have several choices here.
| | 01:49 | In Artwork Viewer, place the movie in
the tiny pane where you can view the
| | 01:52 | album artwork of songs.
| | 01:53 | Let's see what that looks like.
| | 01:54 | I will choose that, click OK, I am
just going to close the movie right now,
| | 01:59 | and when I double click to Play,
there's this panel opens up, and I can see
| | 02:03 | the video down here.
| | 02:04 | (Music playing)
| | 02:06 | Go and pause that again.
| | 02:08 | Now if I click the movie while it's
playing down here, it opens up in its
| | 02:11 | own floating window.
| | 02:12 | (Music playing)
| | 02:19 | Go and close that again.
| | 02:20 | Let's go back to Preferences.
| | 02:24 | Now we already saw what "in
the iTunes window" looks like.
| | 02:26 | Next we have "in a separate window,"
which opens the same kind of floating window
| | 02:29 | that just appear when we click
the movie in the artwork viewer.
| | 02:31 | Now the last two options here are full
screen, which expands the movie to fit
| | 02:36 | your entire monitor, taking up the
full screen size without anything else on
| | 02:39 | screen or in the background.
| | 02:41 | And we also have full screen (with visuals).
| | 02:43 | Full screen (with visuals) is a good
selection to make if you're playing a playlist
| | 02:46 | that contains both video and audio files.
| | 02:48 | When playing video files, the video
will take up the entire screen, but audio
| | 02:52 | files have nothing to look at.
| | 02:54 | So with this option selected, iTunes
will turn on its Visualizer, which we will
| | 02:57 | look at in the next chapter, but is
basically an automated visual effects
| | 03:01 | generator that can be strangely
hypnotic and engrossing to watch.
| | 03:04 | I am going to go head and leave my
settings at "in the iTunes window."
| | 03:08 | So those are the settings that are
available when you play movies and TV shows.
| | 03:11 | For those we have the same
options for playing music videos.
| | 03:15 | The question in your mind now should be,
how does iTunes tell the difference?
| | 03:18 | Well, if you are playing videos you
purchased from the iTunes store,
| | 03:21 | you don't have to worry about it because those
videos come pre-tagged with the right information.
| | 03:25 | But the videos you create yourself or
download from elsewhere won't necessarily
| | 03:28 | be tagged properly or at all.
| | 03:30 | We go ahead and close Preferences, and
I am going to right click on my movie
| | 03:34 | and choose Get Info.
| | 03:35 | Here in the Options tab, use the
Media Kind menu, to let iTunes know what
| | 03:41 | kind of video file this is.
| | 03:42 | In general, files without tags end up
in your Movie library, but if it was to
| | 03:46 | say a music video, I would
select that option from this menu.
| | 03:50 | If this were a TV show, I
could select that option.
| | 03:53 | Now when working with the TV show, you
should also go over to the Video tab and
| | 03:57 | fill out any information you have on
the show itself, like its name, the season
| | 04:01 | or episode number and so on.
| | 04:02 | You don't absolutely have to fill this
out. iTunes will know it's a TV show from
| | 04:06 | your settings under the Options tab,
but this information helps to keep your
| | 04:09 | shows organized, especially if you
are going to watch them on an iPod.
| | 04:12 | I leave this blank for now, but notice
when I click on OK, the movie disappears
| | 04:17 | from my Movie library and
now I find it in TV Shows.
| | 04:20 | I am going to go back and change this back
into just a regular movie. Move back into Movies.
| | 04:26 | So again, it's a good idea to
accurately identify your videos once you have
| | 04:29 | imported them into iTunes.
| | 04:30 | Other than that, importing
and playing videos in iTunes is
| | 04:33 | pretty straightforward.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Managing Your LibraryConsolidating your library| 00:00 | I'm going to go to iTunes > Preferences,
if you're on Windows you'll open Edit >
| | 00:03 | Preferences, and go to the Advanced section.
| | 00:07 | And I've mentioned a couple of times
that I consider a best practice to keep
| | 00:10 | these two options checked.
| | 00:12 | Keep iTunes media folder organized
and Copy Files to iTunes media folder
| | 00:16 | when adding to library.
| | 00:17 | And just make sure that all the files
you import or copy to your central iTunes
| | 00:21 | library, and to make sure iTunes keeps
that library and its folders organized.
| | 00:25 | In this movie, I want to talk about
what happens if you imported content, but
| | 00:28 | didn't have Copy Files to
iTunes Media Folder checked.
| | 00:31 | So I am going to go ahead and uncheck this
option for now and close my Preferences.
| | 00:37 | In my video folder, from my Exercise Files,
there is a short movie called rocks.m4v.
| | 00:41 | I am going to drag that into my iTunes ,
library and if I go to My Movies section
| | 00:50 | there it is and I can play
it. So it plays just fine.
| | 00:58 | Let's see where iTunes is playing it
from. I'm going to right-click on it and
| | 01:01 | choose Get Info, and under the Summary
tab I can see under the Where section
| | 01:06 | it's on my HD hard drive, Users
folder, garrick, Desktop, video, rocks.
| | 01:10 | So the copy I dragged in the iTunes
is the copy that iTunes is playing.
| | 01:14 | It's playing the copy here in my video folder.
| | 01:17 | Because I turned that Copy option off
in Preferences, it didn't make a copy of
| | 01:21 | the movie and placed it into my iTunes folder.
| | 01:23 | Now technically there's really nothing
wrong with this. You can have your media
| | 01:26 | files scattered all over various hard
drives, if that's the way you prefer it.
| | 01:30 | iTunes to manage them just fine.
| | 01:32 | In fact, even if you move the files
iTunes can still keep track of where they go.
| | 01:35 | So if I drag this rocks movie out of
this folder and place it on to my desktop,
| | 01:40 | iTunes can still play it.
| | 01:50 | And if I Get Info on that, you can see
the location now is just desktop, so it
| | 01:55 | knows that it moved.
| | 01:56 | And it actually doesn't even matter
whether iTunes is running when you move the file.
| | 02:00 | So if I quit iTunes and move the
file back into that folder and then open
| | 02:06 | up iTunes again, the movie
will still play just fine.
| | 02:15 | And again it knows that it has been moved.
| | 02:17 | Now it's on the desktop
in the folder called video.
| | 02:20 | So iTunes really can keep track of
where everything in your library is really
| | 02:23 | stored, but I really personally prefer
to keep all of my iTunes content in the
| | 02:27 | main iTunes library folder.
| | 02:29 | With files scattered all over the place,
you run a much higher risk of deleting
| | 02:32 | the folder or files you
thought you didn't need,
| | 02:34 | only to discover it later that the
folder contained a song or video you were
| | 02:38 | managing with iTunes.
| | 02:39 | So if you find yourself in a situation
where your iTunes content is scattered
| | 02:42 | all of your computer in various places
and decide you want to bring them all
| | 02:46 | back together into the main folder,
| | 02:47 | first of all go back to Preferences,
and under Advanced make sure the Copy
| | 02:53 | option here is checked again.
| | 02:55 | Just so in the future you
don't run into that problem.
| | 02:57 | Then go to the File menu,
choose Library and Organize Library.
| | 03:05 | That opens up a window with two check
boxes, Consolidate files and Upgrade to
| | 03:09 | iTunes Media organization.
| | 03:10 | We'll talk about the second option in an
upcoming movie, but for now I just want
| | 03:14 | to make sure that Consolidate files is checked.
| | 03:16 | And what that's can it do is
identify all the files in my library that
| | 03:19 | currently reside outside my iTunes
folder and make copies of them inside the
| | 03:23 | folder and then point to those files instead of
the ones outside the folder. So I'll click on OK.
| | 03:28 | Now, the only thing residing
outside my iTunes music folder was that
| | 03:31 | rocks movie, so that didn't take long at
all and it didn't look like anything happened.
| | 03:35 | I can still play the rocks movie, but
if I get info on it again, you could see
| | 03:45 | that the movie is now playing
from my Users folder: Garrick:Music:iTunes:
| | 03:49 | iTunes Music: Movies:rocks.
| | 03:50 | So this is actually is inside my
iTunes Music folder now, which means if
| | 03:55 | I wanted to know I can just delete the
versions setting in my video folder if I
| | 03:59 | don't need the second copy of it sitting around.
| | 04:01 | So that's how you can bring in all the
various files that might be scattered all
| | 04:04 | over your hard drive and copy
them into your iTunes music folder.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Upgrading to iTunes Media organization| 00:00 | In a previous movie, I showed you how
to consolidate your iTunes library by
| | 00:03 | going to the File menu and choosing
Library > Organize Library, and here you
| | 00:09 | could check Consolidate files.
| | 00:11 | Now the other option you'll
find here is to Upgrade to iTunes
| | 00:13 | Media organization.
| | 00:15 | If you did a fresh or clean install of
iTunes 10, this option might be grayed
| | 00:18 | out with a message that Your media is
already organized as an iTunes Media
| | 00:21 | folder, just as it is in my case here.
| | 00:24 | But what is an iTunes Media folder?
| | 00:26 | Well we've look at the folder structure
of how iTunes keep your media organized
| | 00:29 | but let's take another look.
| | 00:31 | On the Mac, you navigate to your home
folder, to your Music > iTunes and iTunes Music,
| | 00:40 | which might also be labeled iTunes
Media, and then here you'll either find
| | 00:44 | all of your iTunes media including
videos, podcasts and so on in one folder
| | 00:48 | named Music, or if your library is
organized into iTunes Media organization like
| | 00:52 | mine is, you'll see separate
folders labeled for each type of media.
| | 00:55 | Let me show you what this looks like on Windows.
| | 00:59 | So here in Windows you'll find this
folder by going to your Start menu, to your
| | 01:03 | account folder, into My Music > iTunes
and here is iTunes Media, which again may
| | 01:12 | be labeled iTunes Music.
| | 01:16 | And again, either everything will be
in one music folder or already organized
| | 01:19 | into separate folder categories.
| | 01:20 | Let's go back to the Mac.
| | 01:24 | So if your structure already looks
like this, you don't have to do anything.
| | 01:28 | And you won't be able to choose the
Upgrade to iTunes Media organization option
| | 01:31 | in iTunes, because your media already
is organized as an iTunes Media folder.
| | 01:35 | But if you do have the older structure
and you have this option available to
| | 01:39 | Upgrade to iTunes Media
organization, I highly suggest you run it.
| | 01:44 | Because once you run it, then
you'll have these separate folders.
| | 01:47 | Now exactly what you see here depends on
what kind of content you had in your library.
| | 01:51 | For instance, you might also see a Books
folder in here if you had any Audio Books.
| | 01:55 | You might not see Ringtones if you
don't have ring tones. You might not see
| | 01:58 | Mobile Applications if you don't run apps.
| | 02:00 | Notice the Automatically Add to iTunes folder
we've looked at previously is in here as well.
| | 02:05 | But basically you shouldn't notice
any change in the way iTunes operates
| | 02:08 | once we've done this.
| | 02:09 | But this is the current folder structure for
iTunes 10 and you might as want to upgrade to it.
| | 02:13 | And again, it does make it a little
easier to browse and navigate through your files,
| | 02:16 | if you like to do so outside of iTunes.
| | 02:19 | Just don't do anything more than
copy files out of these folders.
| | 02:22 | Don't go moving things around in here.
| | 02:24 | If you want to make changes to the
song files themselves, make sure you do
| | 02:27 | that through iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Extending your library| 00:00 | If like many people you use iTunes as
your primary media management system to
| | 00:04 | organize and play your audio and
video files, you'll most likely reach a point
| | 00:08 | where your content has started to fill
up your hard drive to the point where
| | 00:10 | you're getting dangerously
close to running out of space.
| | 00:13 | Now as we've seen, you do have the
option of going into iTunes > Preferences or
| | 00:17 | in Windows Edit > Preferences, and
under the Advanced section unchecking Copy
| | 00:22 | files to iTunes Media
folder when adding to library.
| | 00:25 | And this lets you keep your media
files on say an external hard drive while
| | 00:28 | still letting iTunes manage them, so
you can see them listed in your library,
| | 00:31 | meaning your music files will stay
on this external drive, but still be
| | 00:34 | playable through iTunes.
| | 00:35 | But that doesn't solve the problem of
files being added to your main iTunes
| | 00:38 | folder when you rip songs off a CD or
download content from the iTunes Store.
| | 00:42 | That stuff will continue to
fill up your main iTunes folder.
| | 00:45 | As we've already discussed, the
default location where iTunes stores your
| | 00:48 | content is listed right here.
| | 00:50 | We can change this to a different location.
| | 00:52 | For instance, we can select a second
internal or external drive connected to
| | 00:55 | your computer by clicking Change.
| | 00:57 | I would like to refer to this as
extending or expanding your library.
| | 01:01 | Now if you're following along with me
I don't suggest you do this with your own
| | 01:04 | copy of iTunes unless you
really are running out of space.
| | 01:07 | Nothing bad will happen, but
there's no need to change your Library
| | 01:10 | location unless you've to.
| | 01:12 | For this example, maybe I want iTunes
to start saving my content to my drive A
| | 01:16 | hard drive, which is an extra drive I
have in my Mac, and maybe I'll create a
| | 01:20 | folder in here and I'll call this iTunes
Library Extension, or whatever you want to call it.
| | 01:26 | So I will create that and choose that
as my location, so you can see that's now
| | 01:30 | listed as the location where new
content in iTunes will be stored.
| | 01:33 | Now at first glance it really looks
like we just redefined iTunes' default
| | 01:37 | library location, and in earlier
versions of iTunes this would be true.
| | 01:41 | In earlier versions of iTunes
changing this location information would make
| | 01:44 | iTunes forget the default iTunes
location information, meaning you would no
| | 01:47 | longer be able to keep track of your
content that still resided in the
| | 01:50 | original location and iTunes would
only track the stuff in the new location.
| | 01:55 | But ever since version 7 of iTunes,
iTunes continues to keep track of all the
| | 01:59 | content in your original location as
well as in the new one, and by specifying
| | 02:02 | this new location on my second hard
drive, which has a lot more room, any new
| | 02:06 | content I add to iTunes, whether it's
from a CD, the iTunes Store, or from just
| | 02:10 | dragging files into iTunes manually,
all that content will be added to the new
| | 02:14 | location, but only if you keep Copy
files to iTunes music folder checked.
| | 02:19 | And that's a case even when you're
only using the original default location.
| | 02:22 | So this allows me to spread my
iTunes files out over multiple locations.
| | 02:26 | So I still have all my original
music in its original location on my main
| | 02:30 | hard drive in my home folder, but
anything I add after this point will be
| | 02:33 | added to this new location.
| | 02:34 | Let me show you what I mean.
| | 02:35 | So you can see I'm getting this
Updating iTunes library information here.
| | 02:41 | Notice all my music is still in here,
even though I changed the location of
| | 02:44 | the iTunes library.
| | 02:47 | Everything is still here.
I can still play music.
| | 02:49 | (Music Playing)
| | 02:53 | And if I look in my user account folder
into Music > iTunes > iTunes Music, my
| | 03:00 | music is all still in here.
| | 03:02 | Now If I go to my Drive A and look
inside iTunes Library Extension, that's a
| | 03:06 | folder I just created and you can
see it's currently empty except for the
| | 03:09 | Automatically Add to iTunes folder,
which iTunes automatically generates and we
| | 03:12 | talked about that in a previous movie.
| | 03:14 | Now on my desktop I have copied a
folder of an album called Hot Fuss by The
| | 03:18 | Killers that I want to copy into
iTunes and I also have a copy of a TV
| | 03:22 | show file here as well.
| | 03:23 | Now I'm not providing these songs
as exercise files, because again,
| | 03:26 | you shouldn't be extending your library
unless you really have to, so I'm just
| | 03:29 | using these as an example.
| | 03:31 | When it comes time to extend your
library you'll most likely to have your own
| | 03:33 | personal songs and videos to add.
| | 03:35 | So I'm going to drag these files just
by selecting them right into iTunes and
| | 03:41 | you can see they are getting copied over.
| | 03:43 | And now if I go back to my Finder and
look inside my Drive A and back inside
| | 03:49 | the Library Extension, notice that
the album in its entirety now appears in
| | 03:53 | Music, there it is.
| | 03:57 | And it's also created a TV Shows folder
since I dragged in a TV show,
| | 04:05 | and there is the file I dragged in.
| | 04:07 | And of course, if I look in my library
under K for Killers, there is the album
| | 04:14 | that I just dragged in right here.
| | 04:16 | And also notice that I didn't lose access
to any of the other content in my library.
| | 04:19 | Everything is still here and still
sitting in my original iTunes folder
| | 04:22 | location and iTunes will
still keep track of them.
| | 04:24 | It's just that the new album and new TV
show and any other content I add from
| | 04:28 | now on will reside in the
new location on my Drive A.
| | 04:31 | So this is a great way to increase the
storage capacity of your iTunes library
| | 04:34 | and spread your content across the
multiple drives, instead of having to copy
| | 04:37 | all of your old files to a new location.
| | 04:39 | Although there may be times when
you will want to move your entire iTunes
| | 04:42 | library to another hard drive, and
I'll talk about how to do that later in
| | 04:45 | this chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with multiple libraries| 00:00 | In a previous movie we looked at how
to extend your library into another hard
| | 00:04 | drive to give iTunes more room to
manage all your content, without losing
| | 00:07 | management of the content
that was on your original drive.
| | 00:10 | Now there may also be times when you
want to keep some of your iTunes content
| | 00:13 | completely separate from other iTunes content.
| | 00:15 | For example, maybe you work with audio
or video files for work all the time.
| | 00:19 | Maybe you transcribe interviews or
speaker notes, maybe you create sound effects
| | 00:23 | or background music, whatever it is,
you know you want to use iTunes to manage
| | 00:26 | your content, but you also don't want
this content intermingling with your
| | 00:29 | personal iTunes library.
| | 00:31 | One solution might be to create an
additional account on your computer, which
| | 00:34 | would give you a clean empty
iTunes library when you run iTunes.
| | 00:37 | But that requires switching back and
forth between user accounts, which can get
| | 00:41 | tedious if we've to do it
multiple times throughout the day.
| | 00:44 | Instead, a better solution would be
to just create a second iTunes library.
| | 00:48 | Now this is different than extending
your library like we saw in a previous
| | 00:51 | movie, which allows you to continue
managing the content in your old library
| | 00:54 | location as well as the new one.
| | 00:56 | What I'm talking about here is a
completely new iTunes library that's also
| | 01:00 | completely independent of any
other library on your computer.
| | 01:03 | To create a new iTunes library, first
make sure you quit iTunes. Then while
| | 01:08 | holding down the option key on a Mac or the
shift key on Windows, startup iTunes again.
| | 01:14 | iTunes will prompt you to choose a
library and from here you can choose an
| | 01:18 | existing library or create a new one.
| | 01:20 | I'll choose Create Library, and I'm
just going to save this to my desktop, and
| | 01:25 | I'll call it iTunes work, for my work
library. You can call yours whatever you like.
| | 01:30 | I'll click Save.
| | 01:34 | So now iTunes opens. Notice the photos
that have been created on my desktop.
| | 01:38 | Your folder will appear in
whatever location you've selected.
| | 01:41 | But also notice, this is a
completely empty copy of iTunes.
| | 01:44 | There is no music, movies, TV shows
or any other content in here right now.
| | 01:48 | This is the default appearance of
iTunes when you first run a new installation.
| | 01:51 | So now I'm free to drag in any content
I like and that will be the only content
| | 01:55 | that shows up in this iTunes library.
| | 01:57 | Now you might never have to use this ability.
| | 01:59 | But if you find yourself in a
situation where you want to use iTunes to
| | 02:03 | manage content that you want to keep
completely separate from your other
| | 02:06 | iTunes content, just hold down
Option or Shift as you startup iTunes to
| | 02:09 | create a new library.
| | 02:10 | Now when you want to switch back to
your original library, just quit iTunes
| | 02:13 | again, and then hold down option or
Shift depending on if your Mac or Windows,
| | 02:18 | and then start up iTunes, and when the
choose library dialog box appears,
| | 02:22 | click Choose Library and then select your
original iTunes library folder, which is
| | 02:27 | in this case in the Mac is
just Music and then iTunes.
| | 02:31 | And now I have my original
iTunes library back in action.
| | 02:34 | So that's how you can manage
multiple libraries in iTunes 10.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding duplicate songs| 00:00 | As you continue to work with iTunes,
you're almost guaranteed at some point to
| | 00:04 | import a song you already have in your
library and in most cases iTunes will
| | 00:07 | dutifully copy that song into your
library again and you will end up with a
| | 00:10 | duplicate of that song.
| | 00:12 | Now iTunes is pretty good at detecting
an exact copy of a file, so if you try
| | 00:15 | to drag a copy of an existing song in
to your library again iTunes won't copy it
| | 00:19 | but there's still always the
likelihood that your library contains
| | 00:22 | duplicates of several files.
| | 00:25 | To find the duplicates,
choose File > Display Duplicates.
| | 00:29 | iTunes then displays any songs that have
the exact same name and the exact same artist.
| | 00:34 | So now I'm looking at all the duplicate
songs iTunes has found, because I have my
| | 00:37 | Music Library selected.
| | 00:39 | If you're trying to find duplicates of
videos, make sure you select Movies or TV
| | 00:43 | Shows or whichever kind of media
you're trying to find duplicates of.
| | 00:46 | Now, if you want to leave this view of
duplicates, you can click Show All at the
| | 00:49 | bottom of the screen to go back to the
main view of your library again, but I do
| | 00:53 | want to work with duplicates
right now so I will go back.
| | 00:57 | And at this point I need to decide
whether I want to keep these duplicate or not
| | 01:00 | because there may be some reasons to
keep copies of duplicates in your library.
| | 01:03 | For instance, this track from Tom
Petty and the Heartbreakers, "Don't Come
| | 01:07 | Around Here No More,"
| | 01:08 | I have two copies of that but notice
that one copy is of his Greatest Hits album
| | 01:12 | and the other copy is of the album it
originally appeared on, Southern Accents.
| | 01:16 | And I want to make sure that song
stays in place on both albums because I
| | 01:19 | might be listening to one or the
other sometime and I don't want the track
| | 01:22 | missing from either album.
| | 01:23 | Or take this track "More To Lose"
from The Jellybricks. And from what I can
| | 01:27 | see here these tracks appear
to be completely identical.
| | 01:29 | They both of the exact same name,
artist, and album title but if I get Info on them,
| | 01:35 | again by right clicking and
choosing Get Info, I can see that one is an
| | 01:39 | AAC file and one is an MP3 file and if
you recall, I created the MP3 version
| | 01:46 | in a previous chapter.
| | 01:47 | So sometimes you have to look at
each track's info to discern the
| | 01:50 | difference between them.
| | 01:52 | It could be that they're different file
types or that one is encoded at a higher
| | 01:54 | quality than the other.
| | 01:56 | Once you figure out the difference,
then you can decide whether or not you and
| | 01:59 | keep the duplicates around.
| | 02:00 | In this case, I might want to keep
both versions, if I need to send the MP3
| | 02:03 | version to some one.
| | 02:04 | Now in the case of the song "Fight
Test" from The Flaming Lips, these tracks
| | 02:08 | really are identical in every way,
except the one version has the album artwork
| | 02:12 | and the other one doesn't.
| | 02:14 | Personally, I think this is a
legitimate reason to get rid of the
| | 02:16 | duplicate since I don't think there
is a reason to keep the version around
| | 02:18 | without the artwork.
| | 02:19 | So I will just have that track selected
and I will press Delete on my keyboard.
| | 02:24 | iTunes is first going to ask me, if I'm sure
I want to remove this song from my library.
| | 02:27 | Now you won't see this dialog box if you
previously checked Don't ask me again.
| | 02:31 | Notice that it also tells me that these
items will be removed from any iPod or
| | 02:35 | iPhone which syncs with my iTunes library.
| | 02:37 | So if you want to keep the song on any
iPod you sync with your copy of iTunes,
| | 02:41 | you will want to keep the song here.
But in this case I'm getting rid of a
| | 02:43 | duplicate, so I don't need to worry about that.
| | 02:45 | So I will click Remove.
| | 02:47 | Next iTunes asks me if I want
to move the files to the Trash.
| | 02:50 | On Windows you will be asked if you
want to move the files to the Recycle Bin.
| | 02:54 | Now, when you remove a file from
your library, you are only removing
| | 02:56 | the reference to file.
| | 02:58 | The file itself is still
sitting in my iTunes library folder.
| | 03:01 | I just wont see it listed
anywhere in iTunes itself.
| | 03:03 | So I have the choice to keep the file
where it is, maybe it's a file I want to
| | 03:07 | keep a copy of it but I don't want to
see in my library, or I can click Move to Trash
| | 03:11 | to move the file to my system trash.
| | 03:14 | Since it's the duplicate I don't need it.
| | 03:15 | It's sitting there taking of extra space,
so I will click Move to Trash and if
| | 03:19 | I actually go look in my system
trash right now, you can see the file is
| | 03:22 | sitting right there.
| | 03:25 | Now, if you're on a Mac and you know
that you want to both remove a file from
| | 03:28 | the library and move it to the trash
without having to go through those two
| | 03:30 | dialog boxes we just saw, you can select
the track and hold down the Command key
| | 03:34 | while pressing Delete.
| | 03:36 | That will automatically remove the
song from your library and move it to
| | 03:38 | the trash in one shot.
| | 03:40 | On Windows, you can hold down Control
as you press Delete but that won't move
| | 03:43 | this song to the recycle bin.
| | 03:44 | It will just remove from your library
without giving you a dialog box asking you
| | 03:47 | to confirm that you want to do so.
| | 03:49 | So that's how you can locate and
remove duplicate songs in your library.
| | 03:52 | When you're done click Show All to
return to the main view of your library.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Moving a library| 00:00 | Previously in this chapter I talked
about how to expand your iTunes library
| | 00:03 | across multiple hard drives, which
can be useful when you're running out of
| | 00:07 | space on your main hard drive
where your iTunes library is stored.
| | 00:10 | But there may come a time when you want
to completely move your iTunes library
| | 00:13 | to another drive, instead of
having it spread across multiple drives.
| | 00:16 | So in this movie I would like to
show you how to move your library to a
| | 00:19 | completely separate drive.
| | 00:20 | Now, I want to address two slightly
different scenarios for moving your library.
| | 00:23 | First, you might want to move it to a
larger drive because your current drive
| | 00:26 | is running out of space, but I'm also
going to show you an optional step here
| | 00:30 | if you're interested in making
your iTunes library portable.
| | 00:32 | And what I mean by portable is that you
can copy over some additional files to
| | 00:36 | your external drive, so that you can
then connect that drive to any computer
| | 00:39 | running iTunes and be able to access
your entire library without having to move
| | 00:43 | or transfer files to that computer.
| | 00:45 | Again, this will be an optional step,
so you can skip it if you only intend to
| | 00:48 | use your iTunes library with
the computer it originated on.
| | 00:50 | Also I do want to warn you that this is
a slightly more advanced topic, because
| | 00:54 | we will be moving files around
using the Finder or Windows Explorer.
| | 00:58 | So be sure you understand what I'm
showing you here before you try it yourself
| | 01:01 | and proceed at your own risk.
| | 01:03 | If you pay attention of what I do here
though, it's actually very easy to do.
| | 01:06 | So let's save your internal drive
where all my iTunes content is stored on my
| | 01:09 | computer is getting full.
| | 01:11 | I want to move the entire library to the
second drive I've connected to my computer.
| | 01:14 | Now, the first thing I suggest to do
is to go to iTunes > Preferences or on
| | 01:18 | Windows go to Edit > Preferences and
under the Advanced tab, if they aren't
| | 01:24 | already selected, make sure to check
Keep iTunes Media folder organized and Copy
| | 01:28 | files to iTunes Media
folder when adding to library.
| | 01:30 | We have mention these checkboxes a
few times already, but again this makes
| | 01:34 | sure that any files you drag into
iTunes get copied into organized folders
| | 01:38 | within your main iTunes library, and
the library location is specified here at
| | 01:41 | the top of the window.
| | 01:42 | And currently it's set to my default
location. But I want to change this
| | 01:46 | location, so I'll click Change.
| | 01:50 | And here I'll select the drive I
want to move my library to, and you can
| | 01:52 | see it's mostly empty.
| | 01:54 | I just have this folder
called backup stuff on it.
| | 01:57 | Now, this is very important. If you
plan or even think that you want to be able
| | 02:00 | to connect this hard drive to another
copy of iTunes on another computer, don't
| | 02:05 | just choose that external hard
drive as the location for your library.
| | 02:08 | You want to make a couple of subfolders here.
| | 02:10 | First I'm going to click New Folder.
I'll call this iTunes so I know what it is,
| | 02:14 | and within that iTunes folder I'm
going to create a another new folder, and
| | 02:18 | I'm just going to call this Library.
| | 02:21 | You can call it anything you want as
long as you remember what you named it.
| | 02:23 | So I'll click Create. With my Library
selected I'll choose that. So you can see
| | 02:28 | now I've changed my library location.
| | 02:30 | Now, if you recall from the earlier
movie on expanding your library, if I just
| | 02:34 | left everything as it is right now,
any new content I drag into iTunes will get
| | 02:38 | stored in this new location while all
of my current songs and videos that are
| | 02:41 | currently in my library will be stored
in the old library location. But I want
| | 02:45 | everything to go over to this new location.
| | 02:47 | So I'm going to close my preferences.
| | 02:49 | So you can see it says Updating
iTunes library and let me just show you
| | 02:53 | what it's done so far.
| | 02:54 | If I go and look in my Drive A, there
is an iTunes folder I created, there is
| | 02:59 | that Library folder, and here it has
just created a folder called Automatically
| | 03:02 | Add to iTunes, which we've looked at before.
| | 03:06 | So now in iTunes, I'm going to go to the
File menu and choose Library > Organize
| | 03:10 | Library, and here I'm going to make
sure Consolidate files is checked.
| | 03:15 | So when I click OK, that's going to
copy all the files now currently stored in
| | 03:18 | my old library location, which is
essentially all of them, into the new
| | 03:22 | location we just selected.
| | 03:24 | So I'll click OK and you can
see it's now copying my songs over.
| | 03:28 | Now depending on how large your library is,
this could take several minutes to several hours.
| | 03:33 | Just let iTunes do its thing
until all the files are copied over.
| | 03:35 | All right, so now iTunes has done
copying and at this point all of my media
| | 03:40 | files are now stored on my other hard drive.
| | 03:41 | If I go out in my Finder again and look
in Drive A and look in iTunes, there is
| | 03:46 | my Library folder I created.
| | 03:48 | And if I look under Music, you can
see it created all these folders.
| | 03:52 | It did in fact copy all of my music over.
| | 03:55 | So now that these files have been copied
over, I'm free to delete the files from
| | 03:59 | their original location.
| | 04:00 | On a Mac, again, that default location
is inside the Music folder in your home
| | 04:03 | folder inside iTunes, and on the
Windows side of things, you can get to that
| | 04:10 | location by clicking the Start menu,
your user folder, and My Music.
| | 04:15 | Now, this is very important. Do not
just delete this entire iTunes folder.
| | 04:20 | iTunes is actually still using this folder.
| | 04:22 | If I open it up, notice these files
you are seeing here, iTunes Library.itl,
| | 04:27 | iTunes Music Library.xml, and so on.
These are database files iTunes uses to keep
| | 04:32 | track of your library's
location and to keep it organized.
| | 04:35 | So even though you moved your content
to another drive, iTunes still uses this
| | 04:38 | original location to store the
information about your library.
| | 04:42 | Now these files take up virtually no
space. What's really eating up your hard
| | 04:45 | drive space is the iTunes Media folder,
where all of your stuff was stored.
| | 04:49 | So you really want to do here is to
delete the iTunes Media folder, which maybe
| | 04:53 | also labeled iTunes Music, and you
can just drag that entire file to your
| | 04:56 | Recycle Bin and then Empty
Recycle Bin to delete it.
| | 04:59 | Let's switch back to the Mac.
| | 05:00 | Now, in the Mac the same thing goes.
| | 05:04 | If I look inside the Music folder
inside iTunes, we see these exact same files here,
| | 05:08 | iTunes Music Library and iTunes Library.
| | 05:11 | Those are the two main important ones,
and again all of the content is stored
| | 05:15 | inside iTunes Music, which, since we've
copied that over, we can actually then
| | 05:18 | just drag to our Trash.
| | 05:21 | And then empty our trash to free up that space.
| | 05:23 | And that's really all there is to it.
| | 05:25 | My media is now safely on my external drive,
and I can still play it off through iTunes.
| | 05:29 | (Music playing)
| | 05:36 | Now I mention in optional step if
you want to be able to make your
| | 05:38 | iTunes library portable.
| | 05:40 | Now as you just saw, I copied my
entire library of content to another drive,
| | 05:44 | but those database files iTunes uses are
still on my main drive in my home user folder.
| | 05:48 | To make my iTunes library portable,
I need to copy these database files to the
| | 05:52 | external drive as well.
| | 05:54 | That's why I had you save your library
in a subfolder on the new drive, because
| | 05:57 | these database files need to stay on
the outside of your iTunes content folder.
| | 06:01 | So I'm just going to quit iTunes for
a moment here, and inside the iTunes
| | 06:07 | folder, now again this is in my
main user folder, Music > iTunes,
| | 06:11 | I'm just going to select
everything in this folder.
| | 06:14 | Now first of all I'm going to open
Drive A so I can see what I'm doing here.
| | 06:17 | And then I'm going to open another
Finder window, go back to my Music folder,
| | 06:23 | iTunes, and now I select everything
in here and I'll copy that over to my
| | 06:29 | other drive, to my Drive A. With those
files copied there, my iTunes library is
| | 06:33 | now truly portable.
| | 06:35 | Everything that has to do with my
iTunes library is now on Drive A.
| | 06:38 | Now you might even want to do this,
even if you don't intend of making a
| | 06:41 | portable iTunes drive. This is just to
make sure that you get everything related
| | 06:44 | to your iTunes library into one location,
but if we were on an external drive and
| | 06:49 | I connected to another computer, all I
have to do is hold down Option on my Mac
| | 06:52 | or Shift on the Windows
as I start up iTunes again.
| | 06:55 | And this is something you're going
to have to do after you move these
| | 06:57 | files anyway. So again, on a Mac,
hold down Option and on Windows hold
| | 07:00 | down Shift. Startup iTunes.
| | 07:04 | Now I'm prompted to choose a library.
So I'll click Choose Library, I'll select
| | 07:09 | Drive A where I've copied everything
over to, iTunes, the folder containing my
| | 07:13 | library, and I'll select iTunes Library.
| | 07:15 | I'll click Choose and I can
again see all of my content.
| | 07:20 | And as you can see, I can
still play any of my content as well.
| | 07:26 | (Music playing)
| | 07:30 | So at this point, if I wanted to, I
really could go into my main home user folder
| | 07:35 | into Music, and then delete this
entire iTunes folder, because now everything
| | 07:38 | that has to do with iTunes is copied
to Drive A. And that's how you move your
| | 07:42 | iTunes library from your main
hard drive to another hard drive.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Playing ContentBrowsing| 00:01 | Now that we have a firm grip on the
many ways to get files into your iTunes
| | 00:04 | library, in this chapter we're going to
look at several aspects of what you can
| | 00:07 | do with those files, like browsing and
searching for music, creating playlists,
| | 00:11 | adjusting how the music sounds when
you playback, and several other ways to
| | 00:15 | enjoy your iTunes content.
| | 00:17 | For this chapter I'm going to start
with several hundred songs and videos in my
| | 00:19 | iTunes library, and again, for a legal
reasons I can't supply any of these as
| | 00:23 | exercise files for these lessons.
| | 00:25 | So you just have to take what you learn
here and apply it to your own personal
| | 00:28 | library. But I did want to make sure
I had a decent number of songs in here,
| | 00:31 | so we can take a look at the
available options for working with them.
| | 00:34 | First let's talk about the ways we
can locate the songs we're looking for.
| | 00:37 | I'm going to stick mainly with my
Music library, but the browsing options are
| | 00:41 | more or less the same, regardless of
whether you're browsing through music,
| | 00:43 | movies, audio books, or
whichever library you're looking at.
| | 00:47 | So if my Music library is selected,
I've listing of every single song in my
| | 00:50 | library and I'm currently in my song list view.
| | 00:54 | The most basic way to browse through my
library is to simply scroll through it
| | 00:57 | and when scrolling, I like to grab
the scroll bar rather than clicking the
| | 01:01 | arrows, since it's much less tedious to
drag the bar up and down than it is to
| | 01:05 | constantly click the up and down arrows.
| | 01:08 | Now right now I'm browsing by artist,
and the library is displayed by artist as
| | 01:11 | default, but as you can see, all you
need to do is to click on any other column
| | 01:15 | header to sort by that column.
| | 01:17 | So I could sort my songs by song Name,
by Album title, or even by the duration.
| | 01:24 | Clicking any selected column a
second time reverses the listing.
| | 01:27 | So if you're listing by Artist from A-Z,
clicking Artist again will list from Z-A.
| | 01:32 | Let me just scroll up, so you can see
the difference there, so you can see XTC
| | 01:36 | is the top on my list now.
| | 01:37 | If I click Artist again, the first artist
here now is The Badlees, which starts with B.
| | 01:43 | Now you can even sort by
several additional columns if you like.
| | 01:48 | Under the View menu, you can choose
View Options, and from here you can turn on
| | 01:52 | any of these other column options you like.
| | 01:54 | So we have Album, Artist, Bit Rate,
Date Modified, Last Played, Last Skipped,
| | 02:00 | and so on and so on.
| | 02:02 | So maybe I want to have the option to
sort my albums by Year, and to see when
| | 02:06 | the last time I played the song was.
| | 02:08 | When I click OK, you can see
now those columns are available.
| | 02:12 | And bear in mind that these are not just
for active sorting of your library.
| | 02:15 | You may never click Year or Last Played,
but instead, just keep them on, so you can
| | 02:19 | easily see this info for each song.
| | 02:21 | To that end you can also drag the
columns around, so you don't have to scroll to
| | 02:24 | the right to see the info you're most
interested in, if you have columns that go
| | 02:27 | beyond the width of your iTunes window.
| | 02:29 | So maybe I want the Year before the
Genre. I just need to drag it over there.
| | 02:33 | Now you can also adjust the width of
the columns by placing your cursor between
| | 02:37 | the headers and dragging
to the left or to the right.
| | 02:41 | So I just remembered that these
columns are available even though you're most
| | 02:44 | likely to browse by artist most of the
time. But if you have several hundred
| | 02:48 | songs or even thousands of songs in
your iTunes library, scrolling through like
| | 02:52 | this is probably not the best way to
quickly find the song you're looking for,
| | 02:55 | especially if you have
many songs by the same artist.
| | 02:58 | For example, I have a lot of songs
here by The Jellybricks, and each one of
| | 03:07 | these songs is another line I have to
scroll through to get to the next artist.
| | 03:11 | One simple way speeding up your search
process in the song list view is to go
| | 03:14 | to the View menu and choose
Column Browser > Show Column Browser.
| | 03:18 | And as you can see, this opens a column that
just lists the artists in my iTunes collection.
| | 03:25 | Currently, All is selected, so I'm
seeing every single song in my collection in
| | 03:29 | the main pane over here, but by
selecting an artist in the column browser, that
| | 03:33 | shows me just the songs by that artist.
| | 03:35 | And it's much easier to browse through
the list of artists, than it is to browse
| | 03:38 | through a list of all my songs.
| | 03:41 | You can also go to the View menu >
Column Browser and then select other categories
| | 03:46 | like, say Genres or Albums.
| | 03:53 | So now I have the ability to start
with a genre, then pick an artist and then an album.
| | 03:59 | Generally, these columns are all you
need to efficiently browse for songs,
| | 04:02 | but if you're into classical music,
you may also want to turn on the
| | 04:04 | Composers and Groupings options.
| | 04:06 | Now they're currently grayed up, because
I don't have enough space to display them.
| | 04:10 | If that's the case, you can go to the
View menu again, Column Browser, and
| | 04:14 | choose On Top, and you can see that it
then allows me to choose Composers and
| | 04:20 | Groupings if I prefer.
| | 04:23 | And now my Column Browser only takes up
the top portion of my screen, but I can
| | 04:28 | still browse through this quite easily.
| | 04:30 | Now as we saw previously, a new view
found in iTunes 10 is Album List view.
| | 04:34 | Now you can see that the column
browser still remains in this view. I'm just
| | 04:39 | going to turn that off for the
moment by choosing Hide Column Browser.
| | 04:43 | I'm going to sort this list by
Artist here in Album view mode.
| | 04:47 | So now we can see that as long as we
have at least five songs from any album,
| | 04:50 | the rtwork for that album will
display to the left of the song list.
| | 04:53 | And this is yet another way that you
can make it easier to find what you're
| | 04:56 | looking for, if you have the
album artwork for most of your music.
| | 05:00 | Sometimes it's just easier to
recognize the album's cover than it is to read
| | 05:03 | its name in a list.
| | 05:04 | We also have the option of a Grid view,
which we can browse exclusively by album
| | 05:08 | cover with no song lists.
| | 05:12 | Rolling your mouse over any album cover
gives you the Play Album button, which
| | 05:15 | when clicked will start playing the
album from the beginning, or you can
| | 05:18 | double-click the cover to enter this
view and from here you can pick a specific song,
| | 05:22 | or click All Albums to
go back to the main grid view.
| | 05:26 | And the fourth viewing
option is the Cover Flow view.
| | 05:28 | In cover flow view, the album artwork is
displayed in the pane of the top of the
| | 05:32 | window, and you can scroll through the
covers by going left to right to browse
| | 05:35 | through your collection.
| | 05:36 | It's kind of like a jukebox.
| | 05:39 | You can also use the left and right arrow
keys on your keyboard to browse through.
| | 05:44 | With each album I select, the songs
for that album appears in the pane below.
| | 05:47 | And you can also adjust the size of
the two panes by using this handle and
| | 05:51 | moving it up or down.
| | 05:52 | I kind of like to have the top pane a
little bit bigger so the artwork shows up larger.
| | 05:57 | There is even a Full Screen option for
Cover Flow view, which we can click here.
| | 06:02 | So you can really appreciate your album
artwork as you browse through it, and we
| | 06:08 | can close that again.
| | 06:10 | Now of course for Cover Flow view and
for Grid view to be effective, you have
| | 06:14 | to have the artwork for at least a
majority of the songs in your library,
| | 06:17 | Otherwise you will just be
browsing through a bunch of blank squares.
| | 06:20 | So remember, you can go to the
Advanced menu and choose Get Album Artwork,
| | 06:25 | which we looked at previously, to
have iTunes try to download and add the
| | 06:28 | artwork to your music.
| | 06:31 | So those are some of the ways
of browsing through your library.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Searching| 00:01 | Another way of locating songs that you
will definitely find increasingly useful
| | 00:04 | as your iTunes library
grows is the Search Field.
| | 00:07 | You are probably already familiar with
the search field from other applications
| | 00:10 | and the one in iTunes
works pretty much the same way.
| | 00:13 | Just type the word or phrase you are
looking for, whether it's an artist name or
| | 00:16 | partial album title, and as you type,
iTunes will begin listing the items that
| | 00:19 | match your criteria.
| | 00:20 | For instance, I'll type the word
time and you can see that iTunes has
| | 00:23 | brought up these 12 songs, and as I continue to
type, it continues to narrow down the results.
| | 00:29 | Now the most important thing to keep
in mind when you're searching is that
| | 00:31 | you have to know whether you're searching
for music, a movie, an audio book and so on.
| | 00:35 | Meaning that you have to select something in
your source pane to search, whether it's
| | 00:39 | a library item or a playlist.
| | 00:41 | Unfortunately you can't perform a
global search across every single item you
| | 00:45 | have in iTunes, so you have to at least
know what type of file you're looking for.
| | 00:49 | So if you want to search music, select music.
| | 00:51 | If you want to search through
your movies, select movies and so on.
| | 00:53 | Now you can narrow down what you're looking for.
| | 00:56 | Notice that searching for "time of"
displays two songs with the actual phrase time o
| | 01:01 | in the song title.
| | 01:03 | We have "Time Of Your Life"
right here, and "In My Time of Need."
| | 01:07 | We also have one song that has the word
Time in it, and the word Of in the artist name.
| | 01:12 | I'll click the magnifying glass in
the search field and I can specify the
| | 01:16 | search for my word or phrase in only the
artist name, the album name, composer or song.
| | 01:21 | I'll search for song and you can see
that it narrows down my search to just the
| | 01:25 | two songs with "time of" in the song title.
| | 01:29 | And that's about it for the search field.
| | 01:30 | If you're a fast typer, the search
field can be a quick way to find a song and
| | 01:34 | you can get your cursor into the
search field right away by pressing
| | 01:36 | Option+Command+F for find on
the Mac, or Ctrl+Windows key+F on Windows.
| | 01:42 | That way you don't have to grab your
mouse to click in that field every time you
| | 01:45 | want to do a search.
| | 01:46 | Just use the keyboard shortcut, type
the name or words you're looking for, and
| | 01:49 | you should be able to find
it in just a few seconds.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Snapback button| 00:00 | In this movie, I want to quickly show
you another feature you'll probably find
| | 00:03 | more and more useful as
your library begins to grow.
| | 00:06 | I am going to start a song playing.
| | 00:08 | (Music Playing)
| | 00:10 | So sometimes you may be playing a song
while browsing through the rest of your
| | 00:13 | library, maybe looking up some
info, maybe changing some info.
| | 00:20 | I am not going to change anything here.
| | 00:21 | I am just going to cancel out of that.
| | 00:23 | But then you want to get back to the
song you're playing but in a particularly
| | 00:26 | large library, you might not
be able to find it too quickly.
| | 00:29 | Because what I'm looking for as I
scroll through here is this little speaker
| | 00:33 | icon that indicates to me
which song is currently playing.
| | 00:37 | And in a large library, it might take me an
unnecessarily long time to locate that song.
| | 00:42 | So what we can do is use this little
button in the right side of the center
| | 00:45 | display called the Snapback button and
clicking this button takes you right back
| | 00:50 | to the song that's currently
playing, let's go ahead and pause that.
| | 00:53 | So that can be a really convenient button to
have especially if you have a large library.
| | 00:57 | The Snapback button can also be really
useful if you're playing your songs in
| | 01:00 | Shuffle mode, which we
will discuss a little later.
| | 01:02 | Sometimes a song might come up
reminding you that you wanted to edit its
| | 01:05 | information or just look up some of its info.
| | 01:08 | In that case, just click the Snapback
button to go right to that song and the
| | 01:12 | Snapback button works whether you're
in the song list, album list, Grid view
| | 01:15 | or Cover Flow view.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Rating songs| 00:01 | Now let's take a look at a feature
that lets you be a music critic, at least
| | 00:04 | here within the confines
of your own iTunes library.
| | 00:07 | We have a column here in Song List view
called Rating and remember if you don't see
| | 00:10 | a particular column, you can either go
to the View menu and choose View Options
| | 00:15 | to turn on the column, or you can right-
click on any column header and select the
| | 00:21 | column you want to appear from here.
| | 00:23 | But I do have Rating already check
so I am just going to leave it as it is
| | 00:26 | and what the Rating column allows
you to do is to give each song in your
| | 00:29 | library a rating from one to five stars.
| | 00:32 | By default each song has no stars, so
I guess you might call that a zero star
| | 00:36 | rating if you like, but in this case
what you can do is click the Rating column
| | 00:39 | and say I think this is an above
average song, so I'll give this four stars.
| | 00:43 | You can either click directly on dot
to place your stars or click and drag to
| | 00:48 | the left and right and release your
mouse from the number of stars you want to
| | 00:54 | appears and that's really all there is to it.
| | 00:55 | Now some people are obsessive about
rating every single song on their library
| | 00:57 | while others do it with some songs and
others ignore this feature entirely.
| | 01:01 | It really depends on whether you feel this is
a worthwhile thing to spend your time doing.
| | 01:05 | We have already seen that you can sort
your songs by column headers so if all
| | 01:09 | your songs are rated, you can sort by
rating and then play them in the order
| | 01:13 | from most stars to fewest if you like.
| | 01:15 | Again you might find this anywhere from
incredibly useful to completely useless.
| | 01:20 | But there are other things you can do
with ratings. For example, you can create
| | 01:23 | smart playlists which we will discuss
later that include only songs that you've
| | 01:26 | rated say three stars or higher.
| | 01:28 | Now one quick tip here, if you're
going through and rating your songs, you
| | 01:32 | probably want to make sure that you
don't have the Rating column selected as you
| | 01:34 | do so, because let's say I scrolled down
into the area where I haven't rated any
| | 01:38 | songs yet and I decide I want to give
this song here four stars. As soon as I
| | 01:44 | rate it, it seems to
instantly disappear. Where did it go?
| | 01:46 | Well, because I am sorting my songs by
rating, the song I just rated popped up
| | 01:51 | to the top among all the other songs I've rated.
| | 01:53 | So there is nothing really is stopping
you from sorting by rating as you rate
| | 01:56 | your songs but it might be little
confusing when the song appears to go away
| | 01:59 | after you rate them.
| | 02:00 | So just be aware of this behavior and
you will probably want sort your songs by
| | 02:04 | artist while you're rating them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring playback options| 00:00 | In this movie, I want to show you a
selection of preferences and options that
| | 00:04 | affect how songs and videos
are played back in iTunes.
| | 00:07 | Let's start by going to iTunes >
Preferences, on Windows you will go to Edit >
| | 00:11 | Preferences, and here I am
going to go to the Playback tab.
| | 00:14 | And we are going to take a look at
these first three settings up at the top.
| | 00:16 | Turning on any of these options
affects every song you play in iTunes.
| | 00:21 | First of all we have the Crossfade Songs option.
| | 00:24 | Basically this has to do with
determining how soon the next song will start when
| | 00:27 | the currently playing song is about to end.
| | 00:29 | And by checking Crossfade you are
setting iTunes so that the beginning and end
| | 00:32 | of songs overlap with each other,
much like they do on radio stations.
| | 00:37 | The slider determines how many
seconds of overlap will occur.
| | 00:40 | The more you drag the slider to the
right, the more the two songs will overlap.
| | 00:43 | So with it all the way dragged to the
right, you will hear the end of the first
| | 00:46 | songs starts fading out as the
beginning of the next song starts fading in.
| | 00:50 | So let me give you an example here. I'll click OK.
| | 00:52 | Let me play the end of one of these songs.
| | 00:54 | (Music Playing)
| | 01:05 | So you can still hear the end of that
first song playing as the beginning of
| | 01:09 | this next song started coming in.
| | 01:11 | I don't know if you could hear that the
first song started fading out a little bit too.
| | 01:15 | Now the original track was not like that.
| | 01:16 | It sort of came to a cold stop, but
because I had Crossfade Songs checked it
| | 01:20 | faded out that song for me.
| | 01:21 | So if you like that effect, if you
don't like having gaps between your music
| | 01:26 | turn on the Crossfade effect.
| | 01:28 | I wouldn't recommend going so far
as to add 12 seconds of Crossfade.
| | 01:31 | It's probably a little too much and
most songs will probably clash instead of
| | 01:34 | transition nicely without that Crossfade.
| | 01:37 | I am actually going to turn it off for now.
| | 01:39 | The next option under Playback
Preferences is the Sound Enhancer.
| | 01:42 | And what this allows you to do is to
drag the slider to the right or left to
| | 01:45 | emphasize the high or low
ends of the playing song.
| | 01:48 | Now it's a kind of hard to demo in this movie.
| | 01:51 | It's really something you kind of have to
hear for yourself, but let's get a song playing.
| | 01:54 | I am just going to click OK and let's
play the song that we're already playing.
| | 01:57 | We will go back to Preferences and I
will drag to the right and left and you can
| | 02:03 | see if you can hear the difference.
| | 02:03 | (Music playing)
| | 02:12 | So it's a little duller there with a
little bit more the low end coming through.
| | 02:16 | (Music playing)
| | 02:20 | And that makes it a little brighter.
| | 02:21 | (Music playing)
| | 02:27 | Pause that again.
| | 02:29 | Again, you will probably hear the
difference a lot better on your own computer
| | 02:32 | and just be aware that it does
affect every song you're playing.
| | 02:36 | Personally I am not a huge fan of
Sound Enhancer but it can be useful in
| | 02:39 | enhancing the dynamic range
of your computer's sound system.
| | 02:42 | If your speakers tend to produce a
little more on the low frequency end of
| | 02:45 | things, you might want to drag the slider
to the right to bring out more of the highs.
| | 02:49 | If your speakers are a little boxy or
tinny, try dragging the Sound Enhancer to
| | 02:52 | the left to emphasize low frequencies
more, and if you think your sound system
| | 02:56 | sounds fine as is, you can of
course ignore this feature completely.
| | 03:00 | Next we have Sound Check and you can
see that it includes an explanation, which
| | 03:03 | says it Automatically adjusts song
playback volume to the same level.
| | 03:07 | Inevitably some of the songs in your
library are going to be louder than others.
| | 03:10 | It's just has to do with the way they
were originally recorded and released and
| | 03:14 | to some extent how they were encoded.
| | 03:16 | For example, songs recorded these days
are a lot louder than songs recorded back
| | 03:20 | in the 60s, so if you're shuffling
songs in your collection, you might be
| | 03:23 | playing an older song that requires you
to turn up the volume so you can hear it
| | 03:26 | at a decent level, only to have your
ears blown off by the next song that was
| | 03:29 | recorded in the past year or so.
| | 03:32 | So the Sound Check automatically
controls the playback level of all songs so
| | 03:35 | that they all playback at
relatively the same volume.
| | 03:38 | So quiet songs become a little bit
louder and louder songs become a little bit
| | 03:41 | quieter and they sort of meet in the middle.
| | 03:43 | Now the first time you check this option
and click OK, iTunes will start scanning
| | 03:49 | through your entire library, analyzing
each song for their volume levels and
| | 03:53 | adding some adjustment information if necessary.
| | 03:55 | Now iTunes has already done this to my
library so you are not seeing any kind of
| | 03:58 | progress bar right now.
| | 04:00 | But the first time you turn on Sound Check,
it will scan through your entire library.
| | 04:03 | Now you don't need to worry that this is
permanently changing the sound of your tracks.
| | 04:07 | All iTunes is doing is adding some
data to the file so that it and iPods for
| | 04:11 | that matter know to dynamically
adjust the volume when the song comes up.
| | 04:15 | If you turn off Sound Check, that
information will stay with the songs but it
| | 04:20 | has no discernible effect on them
until you turn Sound Check back on.
| | 04:24 | Now this is another option I don't
personally really use unless I'm maybe playing
| | 04:28 | a playlist that includes a wide range
of songs spanning several decades and I
| | 04:31 | want to make sure everything plays
back at a consistent volume level.
| | 04:35 | You can decide for yourself whether or
not to use this feature but if you have
| | 04:38 | a large library, you might want to at
least turn it on once so it can scan your
| | 04:41 | library and all the necessary data now
instead of when you really want to use Sound Check.
| | 04:45 | I am just going to leave all
of these options off for now.
| | 04:48 | And those are the global playback
settings I wanted to show you, which again,
| | 04:51 | affect all the songs you playback in iTunes.
| | 04:54 | Now individual songs have their own
playback options as well. Let me click OK.
| | 04:58 | Now I am just going to right click a
song and choose Get Info and if you
| | 05:04 | recall this is where we previously
entered the information for songs like
| | 05:06 | artist, album, and so on.
| | 05:08 | Let's go over to Options.
| | 05:11 | So here we have several options for
adjusting the settings on individual tracks
| | 05:14 | and I should probably mention that these
settings apply to not only audio tracks
| | 05:17 | but to videos as well.
| | 05:19 | The first item is the Volume
Adjustment slider and it's for setting the
| | 05:22 | volume level of just the song I
currently have selected, not for all of our
| | 05:25 | songs like Sound Check is.
| | 05:27 | So if you do have a handful of songs
that are a little too quiet or loud
| | 05:30 | relative to the rest of the songs in
your library, you can use each song's
| | 05:33 | volume slider to
increase or decrease its volume.
| | 05:36 | You can also make the adjustment while
the song is playing to help you get an
| | 05:39 | accurate idea of how much
you are adjusting the volume.
| | 05:41 | So, if I click OK and start the
song playing -- go back to Get Info.
| | 05:46 | I can use the Volume Adjustment slider.
| | 05:49 | (Music playing)
| | 05:57 | Just to give myself an idea of
what the volume level sounds like.
| | 06:00 | Let's go back in there.
| | 06:05 | Next, we have our Equalizer Preset menu,
so we can assign a preset EQ setting to
| | 06:09 | this particular song.
| | 06:10 | I am going to be getting into EQ
settings in just a couple of movies from now,
| | 06:14 | so I am not going to discuss this at
the moment but just be aware that you can
| | 06:17 | set individual EQ settings
to each song in your library.
| | 06:21 | Next we have VoiceOver Language, which
is used in conjunction with certain iPods
| | 06:24 | like the iPod Shuffle for example, which
can verbally provide the song and artist
| | 06:28 | name of the track you currently listening to.
| | 06:31 | You can choose Alternate Languages if
you want to hear the name of your selected
| | 06:33 | track spoken in another language on your iPod.
| | 06:36 | Now this VoiceOver Language menu will
only appear if you've enabled VoiceOver
| | 06:40 | after connecting your iPod.
| | 06:42 | It's found under the Summary section
of your iPod settings in iTunes and you
| | 06:45 | can check out the first movie in the
chapter on managing your iPod to see where
| | 06:48 | that option appears.
| | 06:49 | Then we have Rating, so this is
another place you can rate songs.
| | 06:53 | Just click or drag in here until the
number of stars you want has appeared.
| | 06:57 | But again, we saw that you can rate
songs in the main iTunes window and it's
| | 07:00 | definitely more time consuming to open
the Get Info window just to rate a song.
| | 07:04 | So you probably won't do much rating from here.
| | 07:06 | Next we have Start Time and Stop Time.
| | 07:09 | Occasionally, you might have a song in
which you want it to start playing at the
| | 07:12 | very beginning or near the end.
| | 07:13 | For example, some live performance
songs might include an artist telling you a
| | 07:17 | story about the song or noodling
around on his or her instrument.
| | 07:20 | Unless you've heard this a few times,
you might want to just get to the music
| | 07:23 | each time you listen to
the song from that point on.
| | 07:25 | So maybe the song itself actually
starts 30 seconds into the track, in which
| | 07:30 | case I can check Start Time and change
this to 30 and once I click OK, that song
| | 07:35 | will always start at 30 seconds in.
| | 07:36 | Now I am not damaging or altering the
file at all; I am just telling it that I
| | 07:39 | want to start playing around 30 seconds in.
| | 07:42 | If I decide I don't want it to do
that anymore, I just uncheck Start Time.
| | 07:46 | And the same thing goes for Stop Time.
| | 07:47 | If I wanted to stop before the end
of the song, I would just type in the
| | 07:50 | time code there as well.
| | 07:52 | And these settings also carry over to any
iPods or iPhones you copy this song onto as well.
| | 07:58 | The next option is Remember playback position.
| | 08:00 | This probably applies more
to audio books than music.
| | 08:03 | By checking this option ensures that
you can pause a track in the middle of
| | 08:05 | playback and then come back later and
pick up exactly where you left off even if
| | 08:09 | you have played other
tracks in between that time.
| | 08:12 | This playback position is also
remembered between iTunes and iPods.
| | 08:16 | So if you are listening to a track on
your computer and then copy the track to
| | 08:19 | your iPod before you head out the door,
you will pick up exactly where you left
| | 08:22 | off when you start
listening to the track on your iPod.
| | 08:25 | Now all Audio Books you purchase from
the iTunes store have the built-in ability
| | 08:28 | to remember the playback position.
| | 08:29 | So you don't have to
manually apply the setting to them.
| | 08:32 | But if you import audio books from
another source or if you want to apply this
| | 08:35 | feature to songs or even to videos,
you just need to open the Get Info window
| | 08:39 | and check this option.
| | 08:40 | Next, we have the Skip when
shuffling option and this simply marks this
| | 08:43 | particular track as a track that you
don't want to have come up if you're
| | 08:46 | playing random shuffled songs.
| | 08:49 | Maybe it's a spoken word piece or
maybe a standard comedy album and you don't
| | 08:52 | want these items to
appear among a bunch of songs.
| | 08:54 | Just check this option and it will
never appear when you are shuffling or
| | 08:57 | listening to songs on random.
| | 08:58 | I will talk about shuffling
songs in just a little bit.
| | 09:01 | And this last option here is Part of a
gapless album, and this is for manually
| | 09:06 | setting a song that's part of an
album or at least a series of songs from that
| | 09:09 | album that shouldn't have any
gaps of silence between the tracks.
| | 09:12 | iTunes can usually determine that
information for you but this check box is here
| | 09:16 | for those times when iTunes doesn't
correctly identify a song as gapless.
| | 09:21 | So if you're hearing a gap of silence
between songs where there shouldn't be
| | 09:24 | any, you can check part of a
gapless album to get rid of that gap.
| | 09:27 | Ok, so those are some of the
preferences and options that are available for all
| | 09:31 | the songs or for individual
tracks when you play them back.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating playlists| 00:01 | Up to this point, we've been working
with our iTunes content by selecting our
| | 00:04 | music library and playing music from there.
| | 00:06 | And as we have seen you can do the
same thing with movies, TV shows,
| | 00:09 | podcasts, and so on.
| | 00:12 | Now this is all fine if you only
ever want to listen to albums in their
| | 00:14 | entirety, in their original order.
| | 00:16 | But most people at some point or
another want to create their own mix of tunes
| | 00:20 | to play in an order they
themselves come up with.
| | 00:22 | In iTunes you do this by creating a playlist.
| | 00:25 | A playlist is basically for collecting
specific songs together and playing them
| | 00:29 | in a specific order.
| | 00:30 | Now we are going to get into the
different and more advanced types of
| | 00:33 | playlists shortly but in this movie I
want to talk about the basic playlist,
| | 00:36 | which is again nothing more than a collection
of songs that you arrange in your own order.
| | 00:40 | You can have as many playlists as you
like and call them whatever you want.
| | 00:43 | For example, you might create a playlist
of workout songs or a playlist of songs
| | 00:47 | to play while you do housework or
playlist of tunes for a road trip or you can
| | 00:51 | create playlists for any
other innumerable reasons.
| | 00:54 | Playlists are also used to create a
collection of songs to burn to a CD so if
| | 00:57 | you want to make a custom mix CD for a
friend, creating a playlist is the first step.
| | 01:01 | We will talk about
burning CDs in the next chapter.
| | 01:03 | Playlists can also be transferred to
iPods and iPhones, so there's another
| | 01:08 | reason you might want to use playlists.
| | 01:10 | So to create a playlist, you can choose
File > New Playlist, or press Command+N
| | 01:14 | on the Mac or Ctrl+N on Windows.
| | 01:16 | There is also a New Playlist button
in the lower left-hand corner of the
| | 01:19 | iTunes window, looks like a little plus
symbol, and that creates a new playlist
| | 01:24 | in our source pane.
| | 01:25 | And notice it's under the Playlists heading.
| | 01:28 | In case your Playlists heading is not
expanded, make sure you just click Show
| | 01:32 | to see your playlist.
| | 01:33 | So I am going to select my
playlist that I have just created.
| | 01:36 | It's currently called untitled playlist
so I click it once to select the text.
| | 01:39 | Let's rename this right away and call
it Dinner Music, music to digest your food.
| | 01:45 | Now there is other items here with a
gear icon next to them are Smart Playlists
| | 01:50 | and we'll talk about them next.
| | 01:51 | But let's keep working with
our basic playlist right now.
| | 01:54 | With the playlist selected I only see
this description of what a playlist is and
| | 01:58 | some things I can do with playlists.
| | 01:59 | That's because there is nothing in my
playlist yet, so I need to start adding
| | 02:03 | songs to it and I do that by
going back to my music library.
| | 02:06 | Although I can also create playlists
from movies, TV shows and audio books
| | 02:10 | and even intermingle them, I am just going
to work with music for this example though.
| | 02:14 | So we can either grab songs one at a
time, drag them to our playlist to add them,
| | 02:19 | or you can hold down Command on Mac or Ctrl
on Windows and select multiple songs to drag in.
| | 02:26 | I'm going to scroll through my library,
pick some more songs, drag them in.
| | 02:37 | Now it looks like I clicked a couple
of songs that I already had selected, so
| | 02:42 | iTunes has noticed this and asked me
if I want to add them to the playlist
| | 02:45 | anyway or just skip them.
| | 02:46 | I will choose Skip in this case.
| | 02:47 | It's no need for me to have two
copies of the same song in a playlist.
| | 02:52 | And now when I select the playlist,
I see the songs are added to it and I can
| | 02:56 | continue to add to this
playlist at anytime I want.
| | 02:59 | So I can always go back to my library,
find more songs, and drag them in.
| | 03:06 | All right, so there are the songs
I want in my Dinner Music playlist.
| | 03:11 | I can see down at the bottom here that
it's 51.2 minutes long, which should be
| | 03:15 | plenty of time. If not I can always add
more songs, and I can easily rearrange
| | 03:20 | the order of these songs simply by
grabbing them and dragging them up or down.
| | 03:23 | And that's something you can't do in
your library; you can only arbitrarily
| | 03:29 | arrange songs while in the playlist.
| | 03:31 | Now it's important to understand that
when you create a playlist, you're not
| | 03:35 | duplicating or copying any of your files.
| | 03:37 | Adding songs to playlist does not take
up any significant amount of additional
| | 03:40 | space on your hard drive.
| | 03:42 | All I have done is here is create references
to the songs that are already in my library.
| | 03:45 | So what this means is if I decide I
don't want one of these songs to be in this
| | 03:49 | playlist, I just select it and delete it.
| | 03:52 | Just say Remove and it's gone.
| | 03:56 | But that song is still sitting
safe and sound in my library.
| | 04:00 | Only when you're in your library and you
select songs and hit Delete, that's when
| | 04:04 | the file itself will be removed from
the library. So I am going to Cancel that.
| | 04:08 | But if you are working in a playlist,
you can select as many songs as you like,
| | 04:11 | delete them, and they are still going to
exist in your library just not in the playlist.
| | 04:18 | So that's a one way to create a
playlist simply create a new blank playlist
| | 04:21 | using the Plus button in lower left-hand
corner or choose File > New Playlist or
| | 04:25 | use the keyboard command and then just
browse through your library and start
| | 04:28 | Command+Clicking or Ctrl+
Clicking songs to drag them in.
| | 04:31 | Now another way you can create a playlists
is on the fly with your library selected.
| | 04:36 | Just start selecting some songs, drag
them towards the Source pane, and you can
| | 04:44 | see a little number has appeared
indicating how many songs I am dragging in.
| | 04:47 | And I am just going to drag it
right on top of the Playlists header.
| | 04:51 | Be careful not to drag it on top of
other playlists unless you intend to add
| | 04:53 | these songs to an existing playlist.
| | 04:55 | So make sure you just drag it right
on the header, release, and there it is.
| | 04:59 | So we have a new untitled playlist
already occupied by the songs I dragged in.
| | 05:03 | I will just call this Random grabs.
| | 05:07 | Now this might not be necessarily
faster than creating a blank playlist first
| | 05:11 | but it is an alternative method, and
again if you want to add more songs to a
| | 05:14 | playlist you can always do so at
anytime by dragging them in or you can also go
| | 05:18 | to your library and right-click on
tracks, go to Add to Playlist, and then you
| | 05:23 | can choose which of your existing
playlist you want the song to be added to,
| | 05:26 | which is kind of cool.
| | 05:28 | Similarly you can select one of those
songs, choose Show in Playlist, and it will
| | 05:32 | actually reveal any playlist that
this song is currently a part of.
| | 05:37 | So that's how you create playlists.
| | 05:38 | You can create a playlist for any
purpose or scenario you like, workouts,
| | 05:42 | driving tunes, wedding receptions, or whatever.
| | 05:44 | And again, we can also create them for
burning CDs, which we will talk about
| | 05:48 | in the next chapter, but first we are
going to talk about Smart Playlists in
| | 05:51 | the very next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating Smart Playlists| 00:01 | Now let's take a look at how
to create a Smart Playlist.
| | 00:03 | A Smart Playlist is
essentially a saved search command.
| | 00:06 | We saw how to use the Search field a
little bit earlier, where you can type in a
| | 00:09 | word or partial song title to search
your library for songs or videos, but Smart
| | 00:14 | Playlists give you so much more power in
terms of specifying exactly what you're
| | 00:17 | looking for in a file.
| | 00:18 | The difference between a Smart Playlist
and a regular playlist is that a Smart
| | 00:23 | Playlist has the ability to change and
update its contents on its own based on
| | 00:27 | the criteria you create for it.
| | 00:29 | A regular playlist is a static list
that does not change until you manually add
| | 00:33 | or delete songs from it.
| | 00:35 | So let's take a look at Smart Playlists.
| | 00:37 | Now we already have some Smart
Playlists built into iTunes. We have 90s Music,
| | 00:41 | Classical Music, Music Videos, My Top
Rated, Recently Added, Recently Played,
| | 00:46 | Top 25 Most Played, and by clicking on
some of these I'll see that they already
| | 00:50 | have some content in them, for the most part.
| | 00:54 | So these are the built-in Smart
Playlists that'll automatically update
| | 00:57 | themselves and which you don't have
to do a thing to. They just constantly
| | 01:00 | monitor the files you're importing,
editing, or deleting and update
| | 01:03 | themselves based on that.
| | 01:05 | So let's take a look at how
to create a Smart Playlist.
| | 01:07 | Just like creating a regular
playlist there are multiple ways to create a
| | 01:10 | Smart Playlist. I can go to the File
menu and choose New Smart Playlist or use
| | 01:15 | the keyboard command.
| | 01:16 | On the Mac I can also hold down the
Option key and notice that the New Playlist
| | 01:20 | button, in the lower left hand corner,
turns into this gear icon and that's the
| | 01:24 | icon for the Smart Playlist.
| | 01:26 | On Windows you hold down the Shift
key to bring up the Smart Playlist icon,
| | 01:29 | so I'll click that.
| | 01:31 | And now we are looking at the Smart
Playlist window and it's in here where you
| | 01:34 | create the rules for your playlist.
| | 01:35 | You see at the top we have Match the
following rule selected and if I click on
| | 01:40 | this first menu you can see I have a
lot of different criteria to choose from.
| | 01:43 | Let's say I wanted to create a
playlist based on play count or Plays.
| | 01:50 | Now depending on what you select in this
first menu the other menu in the field,
| | 01:53 | to the right will change. So in this
case it says Plays is, or is not, is greater
| | 01:59 | than, is less than or is in the range.
| | 02:02 | So let's say I wanted to create a
playlist that will show me any file that I've
| | 02:05 | played less than two times
so I'll say is less than 2.
| | 02:10 | This could be a way for me to identify
songs that I don't listen to very much so
| | 02:14 | I can either spend more time listening
to them or maybe just eliminate them.
| | 02:17 | And that's how you create
a rule for a Smart Playlist.
| | 02:20 | If you want to further specify
additional criteria just click the plus button.
| | 02:24 | So, maybe what I really want is a Smart
Playlist that shows me only the songs by
| | 02:30 | The Jellybricks that I have
played less than two times.
| | 02:33 | So Artist is The Jellybricks, plays are
less than 2 times, and because I have it
| | 02:39 | said that all criteria must be matched
I'll only see songs by The Jellybricks
| | 02:43 | that are played less than 2 times.
| | 02:45 | Now I can continue to add more
criteria just by continuing to click the
| | 02:48 | plus button. If I click it too many times I
just click the minus button to remove them.
| | 02:52 | If I've create a playlist that's
likely to include hundreds of songs I might
| | 02:57 | want to limit the number of songs in
the new playlist by checking this option,
| | 03:02 | and if you've limited the number of
songs you might also want to specify how the
| | 03:05 | songs that appear in that list will
be selected, so you have them selected
| | 03:08 | randomly, by album, artist, genre,
highest rating, lowest rating, and so on.
| | 03:13 | I am just going to uncheck that for now.
| | 03:16 | Now Match only checked items means that
only item with the check next to them in
| | 03:20 | my Library will be added to the Smart
Playlist, and you can see the checkmarks
| | 03:23 | next to each item here.
| | 03:25 | So if there are items that you know you
never want to have come up, just uncheck them.
| | 03:29 | And Live updating means the Smart
Playlist will automatically update itself
| | 03:32 | without me having to do anything else.
| | 03:34 | All right, so here's my Smart Playlist.
Again, this will only list songs by The
| | 03:38 | Jellybricks that I have played
less than 2 times. Let's click OK.
| | 03:42 | It's been named The Jellybricks and here
are all the songs that it has found.
| | 03:46 | We have 35 songs in here.
| | 03:47 | Now I am going to right-click up on my
header area and I want to see the number
| | 03:51 | of Plays for each one of these songs
and it looks like most of them I've never
| | 03:57 | played on this computer.
There is one song that I played once.
| | 03:59 | Let me go ahead and play this one again,
this is the one that I joined together
| | 04:02 | in a previous movie, and I am going to
move this to the very end of the track
| | 04:07 | and watch what happens to it when
we reach to the end of the song.
| | 04:08 | I am just going to fool it into thinking
we've played the whole song.
| | 04:18 | (Music playing)
| | 04:20 | And you can see it just disappeared from my
playlist because I have the Smart Playlist setup
| | 04:24 | to only show me songs that are
been played fewer than two times.
| | 04:28 | So that song no longer matches the criteria
for this playlist, which is why it was removed.
| | 04:33 | If you need to edit a playlist, just
simply right-click on it and choose
| | 04:36 | Edit Smart Playlist.
| | 04:37 | Maybe what I really want is a playlist
that shows me all the songs that I played
| | 04:42 | less than two times and
that are not The Jellybricks.
| | 04:46 | Now we also have the ability to
create what are called nested rules.
| | 04:49 | A nested rule is a rule that only comes
into play if the main rules hold true.
| | 04:53 | So for example, right now I have the
Smart Playlist setup so that the items it
| | 04:57 | lists must follow the two rules that
their play counts are a less than 2 times
| | 05:01 | and that the music is not by The Jellybricks.
| | 05:04 | With All selected up here both
of these rules have to apply.
| | 05:08 | Now I am going to click the
ellipses button to add a nested rule.
| | 05:11 | Here I am going to select any, so that
any of these nested rules I am about to
| | 05:14 | create can apply in order for
the song to appear in my playlist.
| | 05:18 | First, maybe I want to limit the
number of songs to only songs that were
| | 05:21 | recorded in the 90s or later. So I am
going to set this to Year is greater
| | 05:28 | than, and I'll say 1989.
| | 05:32 | But maybe I want to make an exception
for The Beatles. If there are any Beatle
| | 05:35 | songs that I have played less than
2 times I still want them to appear.
| | 05:38 | So add another rule here, among the nested
ones, and I'll say Artist is The Beatles.
| | 05:46 | So let's take a look at this again.
| | 05:47 | First of all, for a song to appear
in the Smart Playlist it has to be
| | 05:51 | played less than 2 times.
| | 05:52 | It can't be The Jellybricks. On top of
that, the song either has to have been
| | 05:56 | released after the year 1989 or the
artist has to be The Beatles. I'll click OK.
| | 06:04 | So now I have a list of songs that were
released during or after the year 1989
| | 06:08 | with the exception of The Beatles,
which you can see right here.
| | 06:12 | In fact, let me right-click on my
header area and choose Year and you can see
| | 06:19 | these are all in the 90s or later
with the exception of The Beatles.
| | 06:23 | So as you can see you can get
very specific with Smart Playlists.
| | 06:27 | Also, you're free to edit any of these
pre-existing Smart Playlists as well or
| | 06:30 | even delete them if you don't need them.
| | 06:32 | For example, look at the Recently
Added playlist. If I right-click on that
| | 06:36 | choose Edit Smart Playlist, I can see
the rules here say that the date added to
| | 06:41 | my iTunes Library is in the last 3 weeks.
| | 06:45 | Media Kind is not Podcas, so basically
anything that's been added to my iTunes
| | 06:49 | Library in the past 3 weeks that is
not a podcast will appear in the Smart
| | 06:52 | Playlist or maybe I want to see
everything that's been added including podcasts.
| | 06:56 | So I'll click minus, to get rid of
that rule, click OK and then if I had any
| | 07:00 | podcasts that are been added in the past
3 weeks they would appear in this list.
| | 07:03 | So I just wanted to show you, you can
edit the Smart Playlists that appear by
| | 07:07 | default in your iTunes Library.
| | 07:10 | And that's how you work with
Smart Playlists in iTunes 10.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating playlist folders| 00:01 | As you continue to create your various
playlists and Smart Playlists in iTunes,
| | 00:04 | you will see how quickly your
Source pane starts to fill up.
| | 00:07 | Now, yes, the Source pane is scrollable,
but after you have a couple dozen or so
| | 00:10 | playlists created over here, it will
become tedious to constantly scroll through
| | 00:14 | to find a playlist you are
looking for. Enter playlist folders.
| | 00:17 | Playlist folders let you collect and
organize your playlists and Smart Playlists
| | 00:21 | into a logical, at least to
you, collection of folders.
| | 00:24 | Now I've created a half-dozen or so
additional playlists here and even now
| | 00:28 | you can see how crowded
my Source pane is looking.
| | 00:30 | So let's create some playlist folders
to make things a little more manageable.
| | 00:33 | Just choose File > New Playlist Folder.
| | 00:37 | Now I have an untitled
folder under my Playlists heading.
| | 00:41 | So maybe I want to create a folder
called Genres and into my Genres folder
| | 00:46 | I'll drag my Big Band playlist, and you can
see right away it's been added to the folder.
| | 00:52 | It's slightly intended to the right and
a toggle arrow appeared next to Genres
| | 00:55 | folder showing I can collapse and
expand that folder to show its contents.
| | 00:59 | Let's also drag in Hip
Hop and let's say Jazz Favoritess.
| | 01:07 | So what I have now is a fully
collapsible folder containing playlists I
| | 01:10 | have dragged into it.
| | 01:12 | When collapsed it makes it much easier to
see the other items under my Playlists heading.
| | 01:15 | When I do want to access my Genres
playlist, I just need to toggle up in the
| | 01:19 | folder and select the playlist I want.
| | 01:23 | You can even nest additional
folders inside your playlist folders.
| | 01:26 | Just have your folder selected, and again
choose File > New Playlist Folder and there it is.
| | 01:32 | There is a folder inside the folder now.
| | 01:34 | So if I wanted to create an additional
level of organization in here, I just
| | 01:38 | need to create a nested playlist folder.
| | 01:40 | Now you may occasionally create a
nested folder by accident when you meant to
| | 01:43 | create a regular playlist folder.
| | 01:45 | If that's the case just select the folder
and hit the Delete key on your keyboard.
| | 01:49 | Then make sure that any of your main
playlists or Smart Playlists is selected
| | 01:52 | before you choose File > New Playlist
Folder and that will put the new playlist
| | 01:57 | folder in he main hierarchy.
| | 01:58 | Maybe I will call this one Eventful
tunes and this will be for playlists I have
| | 02:04 | created for various events and activities.
| | 02:06 | Maybe I will drag in Chill Out.
| | 02:10 | Scroll down so that I can see these here.
| | 02:12 | Grab Dinner Music, Fast
Driving, and let's do Workout.
| | 02:18 | Now I just happen to be dragging in
regular playlists, but you can drag in
| | 02:22 | Smart Playlists into your
playlist folders as well.
| | 02:24 | Be aware that playlist
folders are only for playlists.
| | 02:28 | You can only drag playlists and Smart
Playlist into them, but not any music or
| | 02:31 | video files directly.
| | 02:32 | You can only drag music and video
files into the playlists that appear inside
| | 02:36 | the playlists folder.
| | 02:38 | So I now have two playlist folders.
| | 02:39 | I can collapse them both when they
are not in use and now my Source pane is
| | 02:44 | looking a lot less cluttered.
| | 02:45 | Not only that, but it is a lot less
cluttered and more organized, because I've
| | 02:49 | arranged my playlists into folders
that make sense to me and in which I can
| | 02:52 | quickly and easily find
the playlists I want to play.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Shuffling and repeating| 00:00 | Now I am going to take a little more
time and go into more detail about the
| | 00:03 | Shuffle and Repeat buttons down here in the
lower left hand corner of the iTunes window.
| | 00:08 | Let's start with the Repeat button,
which as I mentioned earlier controls
| | 00:11 | whether a playlist is played once,
repeated, or if a single song is repeated.
| | 00:15 | Now, if I have say my entire music
library selected, that's considered my
| | 00:19 | playlist as far as the
Repeat button is concerned.
| | 00:22 | If I just have one of my regular
playlists selected, just this entire playlist
| | 00:26 | will be repeated over and over
again if I click the Repeat button.
| | 00:29 | Now if I click the Repeat button a
second time, you will see a small number 1
| | 00:33 | appears over the button.
| | 00:35 | That means it will only play the
selected song over and over again.
| | 00:38 | So if I started a song playing and
take it all the way to the end,
| | 00:43 | (Music playing)
| | 00:51 | notice it starts from the beginning again.
| | 00:55 | So that's the Repeat button.
| | 00:56 | When it's off it's not blue.
| | 00:58 | That's how know whether it's on or not.
| | 01:00 | So one click means all items in the
selected playlist will be repeated and a
| | 01:04 | second click means only the
selected item will be repeated.
| | 01:06 | That remains true even if you
have more than one selected.
| | 01:10 | iTunes will only repeat the first item you have
selected if the 1 appears in the Repeat button.
| | 01:14 | So if I hold down Shift and select a
bunch of songs, iTunes will still only
| | 01:19 | repeat the currently playing song.
| | 01:20 | So let me turn that off and now
let's look at the Shuffle button.
| | 01:26 | Unlike the Repeat button,
Shuffle is either on or off.
| | 01:29 | There is not third state for this
button and basically this randomizes the
| | 01:32 | songs iTunes plays.
| | 01:35 | So if I select my entire library and
turn Shuffle on and click Play, it'll play
| | 01:41 | selection for my entire music collection.
| | 01:44 | If I click the Next button, you
can see there's the next random song.
| | 01:48 | This one is from Jimmy Eat World.
| | 01:49 | I click the Next button again, there is
another random song and so on and so on.
| | 01:55 | Now, if you have a playlist selected and
turned Shuffle on, iTunes will randomly
| | 02:00 | play just a song from this playlist.
| | 02:02 | Notice as I toggle Shuffle on and off,
each time it randomizes the list of songs.
| | 02:06 | So when it's on there is randomization.
| | 02:09 | When it's off, there is another
randomization, just like that.
| | 02:14 | Now you do have some
additional options for shuffling songs.
| | 02:18 | Under the Controls menu you will find
Shuffle, and from here you can choose the
| | 02:22 | shuffle By Songs, By Albums, or
By Groupings. Let's pick Albums.
| | 02:28 | Notice now even with Shuffle on, all
the songs from this playlist that are on
| | 02:32 | the same album have stayed together.
| | 02:33 | This is nice if you want to hear
all the songs from a certain album in
| | 02:37 | their proper order before iTunes picks the
next collection of songs from another album.
| | 02:41 | Now Controls > Shuffle we also have
By Groupings and that's generally for
| | 02:46 | classical music which has
movements that have been grouped together.
| | 02:49 | I don't have any classical music in
my library, but if you do, you can use
| | 02:52 | this option to make sure movements stay
together in their proper order even when shuffling.
| | 02:55 | I am going to switch back to the
default By Songs Shuffle option.
| | 02:59 | So that's how the Shuffle and
Repeat buttons work here in iTunes 10.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using iTunes DJ for party playlists| 00:00 | As we've previously seen, the iTunes
Shuffle button is a good option to have if
| | 00:04 | you just want to play continuous
nonstop music from your entire music library
| | 00:08 | or from a selected playlist, but it
really doesn't give you any control over
| | 00:11 | what songs are played.
| | 00:13 | So in this movie I want to look at
iTunes DJ, which makes it a little easier to
| | 00:16 | come up with a random collection of
tunes while at the same time making it
| | 00:19 | easier to control which songs make the list.
| | 00:22 | iTunes DJ should appear as the first item
under Playlists here in the Source pane.
| | 00:26 | If you don't see it, go to
Preferences and under the General tab make sure
| | 00:31 | iTunes DJ is checked.
| | 00:32 | When I first select iTunes DJ, I see
the screen giving me a little information
| | 00:38 | about iTunes DJ which as you can see it
tells me that I can change the list of
| | 00:41 | upcoming songs at any time by
adding, removing, or reordering them.
| | 00:45 | Another very cool feature is that you
can allow people with iPhones or iPod touches
| | 00:48 | who have the free iTunes
Remote application installed to place
| | 00:51 | requests for songs.
| | 00:53 | This is a great feature for parties
and it lets your guests participate in
| | 00:55 | the music selection.
| | 00:56 | Let's click Continue.
| | 00:57 | So now we are looking at the iTunes DJ
playlist and here are 15 random songs
| | 01:03 | that it has selected.
| | 01:04 | So this is kind of like the Shuffle
feature, but unlike the Shuffle feature
| | 01:07 | where you can't tell which songs are
coming up here in iTunes DJ you can clearly
| | 01:10 | see the next 15 songs that it will
be playing, which allows you to make
| | 01:13 | adjustments if you like.
| | 01:15 | If you don't like this particular
collection at all, just click the Refresh
| | 01:18 | button to instantly get a list of 15 more songs.
| | 01:22 | Within this list you can easily
reorder the songs just by grabbing them and
| | 01:25 | dragging them up or down.
| | 01:27 | Now I can start playing from the top of
the list just by double-clicking.
| | 01:34 | (Music playing)
| | 01:37 | But I can also click any of the other
songs in the list to start them playing.
| | 01:40 | Now songs that have played appear in
gray at the top of the list, which is
| | 01:44 | another convenient feature for when
someone comes running up to you at the
| | 01:47 | party and asked the name of the song
that was just playing or the song that
| | 01:49 | played 20 minutes ago.
| | 01:51 | By default iTunes DJ select from your
entire music library, but if you want it to
| | 01:55 | only select from a certain playlist,
just click the Source menu down here and
| | 01:58 | find your playlists.
| | 02:00 | All the playlists you've
created will appear in this menu.
| | 02:02 | So you might want to take some time to
create a playlist before you start iTunes
| | 02:05 | DJ at your party or get together.
| | 02:08 | And don't forget about Smart Playlists.
| | 02:09 | For example, on my home computer I
have a Smart Playlist that among other
| | 02:13 | things ignores all spoken word and
audio book files I use that for my iTunes DJ tunes,
| | 02:17 | because I probably don't want
a chapter from Atlas Shrugs suddenly
| | 02:20 | coming up during a party.
| | 02:22 | I am not get worry about that way
right now, because I don't have any audio
| | 02:24 | books installed in this computer.
| | 02:25 | Now by default you always see the
upcoming 15 songs, which should give you
| | 02:29 | plenty of leeway to move or
delete any songs you don't like.
| | 02:32 | As each song gets played, another one
is added to the bottom of the list.
| | 02:35 | If you want to see more or fewer
upcoming songs, click Settings, and here you
| | 02:40 | can choose to see anywhere
from 0 to 100 upcoming songs.
| | 02:44 | This is also where you can determine how
many recently played songs you want to see.
| | 02:48 | So if you want a longer list of the
songs that have already played, maybe
| | 02:50 | you want to choose 20.
| | 02:51 | I will leave mine at 5 though.
| | 02:54 | We also have the option here to
play higher rated songs more often.
| | 02:57 | So if you take advantage of the
rating feature we discussed earlier you
| | 03:00 | might want to check this option, so more of
your favorite songs show up more frequently.
| | 03:04 | Now while we are in here let's also
check Allow guests request songs with
| | 03:07 | Remote for iPhone iPod touch.
| | 03:10 | This is the option to allow guests with
iPod touches and iPhones with the iTunes
| | 03:13 | Remote application installed to request songs.
| | 03:16 | The Remote application is a free
application from Apple you can download from
| | 03:19 | the app store that allows iPods and
iPhones on your network to control iTunes.
| | 03:23 | So the most important thing is that
you allow your guests to access your home
| | 03:26 | wireless network, meaning the same
network your computer is running iTunes on.
| | 03:30 | Otherwise, they won't be able to
connect to iTunes to browse your songs.
| | 03:33 | Now we have the option of adding a
Welcome Message for your guests to see.
| | 03:39 | So I typed "Welcome to my party!
| | 03:40 | Feel free to place your song requests."
| | 03:43 | Next, you can check Restrict requests
to source and from this menu you can
| | 03:47 | choose a playlist to let limit your guests to.
| | 03:49 | So they will only be able to select
songs from your approved playlist, which you
| | 03:52 | probably want to do in case some
prankster decides to pull a college lecture you
| | 03:55 | recorded or something like that.
| | 03:56 | I am just going to unchecked for now.
| | 03:59 | Another fun option is to Enable voting,
which only works right if you have
| | 04:03 | several people with iPod touches or
iPhones and you can let them duke it out by
| | 04:06 | vote to determine what song plays next.
| | 04:09 | Lastly, you can password protect
iTunes and only provide the password to the
| | 04:13 | iPod touch or the iPhone users who can
handle the enormous responsibility of
| | 04:16 | choosing the tunes for your party.
| | 04:19 | So maybe I will add a password here of "rock on."
| | 04:21 | So let's click OK and see how this works.
| | 04:26 | So on my iPhone I'm going to start up the
Remote app and in here I am going to type Settings.
| | 04:31 | Right here at the top of the screen I
can see the iTunes DJ library I just
| | 04:36 | set up is available.
| | 04:38 | The lock icon next to it
indicates that it is password protected.
| | 04:41 | So I am going to select it and
then type in my password that I set up.
| | 04:54 | So now I see the same list of songs
currently listed in my iTunes DJ listing.
| | 04:58 | I can also tap Now Playing to
see the currently playing track.
| | 05:02 | Now I am seeing the cover art
for the currently playing song.
| | 05:04 | Of course, it's not currently playing,
but it's the one that will play once I
| | 05:08 | click Play on iTunes.
| | 05:09 | Incidentally, this is a great way for
iPod touch an iPhone users to just see the
| | 05:13 | artist, album, and song that's
currently playing at your party.
| | 05:16 | Now I am going to tap Request a Song.
| | 05:19 | This allows me to browse through the
entire library of songs or if I just set up
| | 05:22 | a playlist, it would allow my
guest to browse just that playlist.
| | 05:26 | So I am going to look through here.
| | 05:28 | I will find The Jellybricks. Pick a song.
| | 05:33 | So that places the song next in the list.
| | 05:38 | Now if there are other people around
with the iPhones, they would see that the
| | 05:41 | song now has one vote.
| | 05:42 | You can see the little
heart icon next to the song.
| | 05:45 | Back here on my iTunes screen you can also
see that Goodnight To Everyone has one vote.
| | 05:49 | Now other guests could also select
the same song in their phone to add more
| | 05:52 | votes to move it to the top of the
list, or they can pick other songs.
| | 05:55 | The songs with the most votes move to
the top of the list just as they should in
| | 05:58 | a proper democratic society.
| | 06:00 | But just people with iPod touches and
iPhones shouldn't have all the say in
| | 06:03 | what's coming up, right?
| | 06:04 | If someone comes up to you at the
party and request a particular song and it
| | 06:08 | doesn't happen to be one of the
upcoming songs, you can go into your Library,
| | 06:13 | find the song they want,
and then right-click on it.
| | 06:17 | Now here we have the choice
of Play Next in iTunes DJ,
| | 06:21 | (Music playing)
| | 06:24 | which as you can see adds it to the
very top of the list and it start playing.
| | 06:28 | Now if there were already a song
currently playing, it will add the song
| | 06:31 | immediately below it on the list.
| | 06:33 | It won't just interrupt
the currently playing song.
| | 06:35 | Now the other option we
have is Add to iTunes DJ.
| | 06:40 | So I selected that with a song "Up To You."
| | 06:42 | So if I go back to iTunes DJ, you can
see the song "Up To You" now has one vote.
| | 06:46 | Anybody looking at this list on their
iPhone to iPod touch would see that they
| | 06:50 | also has one vote, so they could give
it another tap, which I will do in this
| | 06:53 | case and you can see now it has
two votes and has moved up the list.
| | 06:57 | So again this is a feature that allows
everybody to participate in the music
| | 07:01 | that's playing at party and that's
the iTunes DJ feature of iTunes 10.
| | 07:04 | So forget about mix CDs for parties.
The next time we have a get together, tell
| | 07:08 | your friends to bring their iPhone and
iPod touches and make your party music an
| | 07:12 | interactive experience.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Equalizer| 00:01 | Now let's take a look at
iTunes built-in Graphic Equalizer.
| | 00:04 | In the world of audio equipment an
equalizer, also called an EQ, is a device
| | 00:08 | that allows you to adjust the level of
specific ranges of frequencies, which
| | 00:11 | can enhance the sound of your music or even
compensate for limitations in your sound system.
| | 00:15 | It's kind of like the bass and treble
does on your stereo, but with a lot more
| | 00:19 | granular control and flexibility.
| | 00:22 | You can open the EQ by choosing
Window > Equalizer, so this is the EQ here.
| | 00:27 | It's currently turned on and its
setting is Flat, meaning all of its frequency
| | 00:31 | sliders are set to 0 db, so they are
having no effect on the music I playback.
| | 00:35 | If I am getting too technical, the
values you see going across the bottom of the
| | 00:38 | EQ represent the range of human
hearing in hertz. The lower frequencies are on the
| | 00:42 | left, basically the base frequencies,
and they move into the higher frequencies
| | 00:46 | as you go to the right.
| | 00:47 | The vertical values represent decibels,
basically units that measure the volume
| | 00:51 | or intensity of each hertz frequency.
| | 00:53 | So by moving these sliders, you can
increase or decrease the level of each
| | 00:56 | individual frequency.
| | 00:58 | The Preamp slider controls the level
of volume before it reaches the volume
| | 01:01 | slider in the main iTunes window.
| | 01:03 | So the Preamps slider can be a useful
feature if you're trying to listen to
| | 01:06 | a particularly low-level recording,
and you need to raise the volume to a
| | 01:10 | level higher than you can achieve by
cranking the iTunes volume slider all the way up.
| | 01:13 | So let's start a song playing.
| | 01:16 | Find a song to play here.
| | 01:20 | (Music playing)
| | 01:22 | Bring up the EQ again. So you can
increase the volume with the preamps slider if
| | 01:27 | the song is too quiet, or
decrease the Preamp if it's too loud.
| | 01:36 | Now just be aware that setting the
Preamps slider to its highest or loudest
| | 01:40 | position or even near the highest
position could cause distortion if the song
| | 01:44 | you playing is already fairly loud.
| | 01:46 | This won't necessarily cause equipment damage.
| | 01:48 | In fact, it probably won't, but it
will cause your song to sound distorted or
| | 01:51 | clipped, because you're
sending too much level into iTunes.
| | 01:54 | So again, these other 10 sliders
affect individual frequencies, starting
| | 01:57 | with the lower frequencies on the left,
moving towards higher frequencies on the right.
| | 02:01 | Being able to adjust specific
frequencies gives you the ability to boost
| | 02:05 | aspects of the audio that might be
difficult to hear or to reduce other sounds
| | 02:08 | that are too overbearing.
| | 02:09 | For example, if you're listening to your
music through your laptop speakers, you
| | 02:13 | will probably find that the base
frequency through these tiny speakers is a
| | 02:16 | little weak, so you might want to
manually boost the lower frequencies.
| | 02:22 | And then listen to see if
that improves the sound at all.
| | 02:24 | Now of course, you can't get booming
based out of tiny laptop speakers, no
| | 02:27 | matter how good an EQ you have, but you
can make the audio sound a little bit better.
| | 02:31 | Now one thing you might want to do is
to start a song playing, bring up the EQ,
| | 02:38 | and you can hear that Preamp is
distorting, so let's bring that back down to 0.
| | 02:41 | (Music playing)
| | 02:42 | Now I am going to turn on the Graphic EQ,
and this represents the frequencies of
| | 02:47 | each moment of the song.
| | 02:49 | This is going to give you an overall
level of the range of frequencies in the song.
| | 02:53 | So while the song is playing, I can see
that the voice falls, let's see, probably
| | 02:58 | right around this range here.
| | 03:00 | So if I wanted to boost the vocals a
little bit so they came more through more clearly,
| | 03:03 | I can try raising
frequencies in that general range.
| | 03:05 | (Music playing)
| | 03:12 | It's probably hard to hear here, but I
am actually boosting the vocals a little
| | 03:15 | bit by moving that slider up.
| | 03:16 | Now you might not be able to hear the
changes that well in this recording,
| | 03:22 | you will hear it better for your own copy of
iTunes, but again, looking at the Graphic
| | 03:25 | EQ can just give you an idea
of where the audio ranges fall.
| | 03:28 | So if you see that it's a little lacking
on the base end, you can bring those up
| | 03:31 | or the high end if those seem low,
you can bring those up as well.
| | 03:35 | Generally, the human ear hears the
midrange frequency fairly well, so you might
| | 03:38 | bring those down a little bit while
boosting the low and high frequencies.
| | 03:42 | Often times you will see EQs
that looks something like this.
| | 03:47 | But it's really something you will just
have to play around and experiment with.
| | 03:50 | Just bear in mind that when you change
the equalizer settings, you are affecting
| | 03:53 | the sound of all the songs you play.
| | 03:55 | So every song I play from this
point will be equalized with these
| | 03:58 | particular settings.
| | 03:59 | That's not to say I am permanently
changing the files though; they are simply
| | 04:02 | getting played through the EQ with
these settings applied and you can always
| | 04:05 | turn the EQ off or on.
| | 04:06 | Now if you are not quite sure what to
do with these sliders, there are quite a
| | 04:10 | few preset settings available in this menu.
| | 04:12 | So if I am listening to
jazz, I might choose jazz.
| | 04:15 | So you can see that automatically
resets the sliders to a setting that has been
| | 04:19 | optimized for jazz recordings.
| | 04:21 | The bass is slightly boosted, the
midrange frequencies are set just as little
| | 04:25 | bit lower, and the higher frequencies
rise up a little bit, so each one of these
| | 04:30 | settings moves the sliders
into different positions.
| | 04:36 | Now don't let the names of certain
presets discourage you from trying them out.
| | 04:40 | For instance, depending on your
computer and its speakers, you might find that
| | 04:43 | the Dance setting sounds
pretty good with classical music.
| | 04:46 | Your best bet is to try several of the
presets to find which one best enhances
| | 04:49 | the sound of your music through your system.
| | 04:52 | If your decide against using the EQ
altogether, you can either just turn it off
| | 04:55 | or select Flat from the menu, and if
after experimenting with the sliders, you
| | 05:00 | find a setting that really makes your
music sound great, we just move this
| | 05:04 | around a little bit.
| | 05:07 | You can choose from this menu Make
Preset, and I can give this a name. I will
| | 05:12 | just call this My Settings.
| | 05:15 | And now I can select My
Settings anytime from the Preset menu.
| | 05:18 | So I can switch to another one, and
then choose My Settings to go back to
| | 05:21 | that setting that I had.
| | 05:23 | So this is how you set the EQ
for all the audio you playback.
| | 05:27 | You can also set the EQ for individual songs.
| | 05:29 | That way if there is the song in your
library that just doesn't sound quite
| | 05:32 | right because of the way it was recorded
or whatever, you can right-click on it,
| | 05:36 | choose Get Info, and under Options
you will find the same Equalizer Preset
| | 05:42 | settings that we just looked at,
including the custom one which I just created.
| | 05:46 | The difference is that these presets will
affect only the currently selected song.
| | 05:50 | So maybe I will select Rock for
this track and then I will click OK.
| | 05:55 | And let me bring up the EQ again
and just place it where we see it.
| | 05:58 | I will just make my iTunes window smaller here.
| | 06:01 | And if I play this song, let
me just play another song first.
| | 06:04 | (Music playing)
| | 06:05 | Notice that it is set to My Settings,
but if I go back and play the song I
| | 06:09 | set my Preset settings to, it switches
back to Rock, which is the EQ setting
| | 06:16 | I set to this track.
| | 06:17 | Now another option we have for setting
individual EQs is to the View menu to
| | 06:23 | View Options, and from
here I can choose Equalizer.
| | 06:27 | That gives me an Equalizer column for
everyone of my songs and now I can easily
| | 06:31 | come through here and set different EQ
settings for each one of these tracks.
| | 06:35 | So now when I play certain songs
you will see the equalizer change.
| | 06:38 | (Music playing)
| | 06:43 | Let's get that where you can see it.
| | 06:45 | (Music playing)
| | 06:52 | And so on. So that's the iTunes Equalizer and
some various options you have for setting the
| | 06:57 | overall EQ, as well as individual song EQs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Visualizer| 00:01 | So listening to music is a great
pastime, but what if you're someone who just
| | 00:04 | has to look at something
while listening to music?
| | 00:07 | While iTunes has you
covered with the Visualizer.
| | 00:10 | The Visualizer is like a built-in light
show that reacts to the beats and sounds
| | 00:14 | of the music you play.
| | 00:15 | Overtime, Apple has quietly added more
and more options and types of Visualizers
| | 00:19 | to iTunes and some of them
are just really gorgeous.
| | 00:22 | The best way to see what's
available is to just look at the Visualizer.
| | 00:25 | I am going to start a song playing,
and just pause it just so we have
| | 00:30 | something queued up.
| | 00:31 | Now I am going to go to the View
menu and choose Show Visualizer.
| | 00:35 | So we are just seeing the sort of
moving ball of light on the screen right now.
| | 00:44 | Nothing is really happening,
because no music is playing.
| | 00:46 | So let's start the music
playing again by hitting Spacebar
| | 00:50 | (Music playing)
| | 00:52 | And you can see the Visualizer just explodes
in this animation of light and movement.
| | 00:59 | (Music playing)
| | 01:00 | Go and pause that again.
| | 01:03 | So once you get the Visualizer going,
you can see it just continues to move,
| | 01:06 | but when we start the music it really
moves again, reacting to the sound of the music.
| | 01:13 | (Music playing)
| | 01:15 | Pause that again.
| | 01:16 | So there are several Visualizer
looks or appearances available.
| | 01:20 | To see each of them go to the View menu
to Visualizer and this is the list here.
| | 01:25 | What we are looking at right now
is the default iTunes Visualizer.
| | 01:29 | We have iTunes Classic Visualizer,
which was the original Visualizer that came
| | 01:33 | with early versions of iTunes.
| | 01:34 | Again, let me start the music playing.
| | 01:36 | (Music playing)
| | 01:39 | It just takes a second kick in.
| | 01:40 | (Music playing)
| | 01:44 | Take a look at another one. Here is Lathe.
| | 01:49 | (Music playing)
| | 01:52 | It's kind of pulses along with the music.
| | 01:54 | (Music playing)
| | 01:57 | Let's go ahead and choose another one
while the music just continues to play.
| | 01:59 | (Music playing)
| | 02:05 | And the last one is Stix.
| | 02:07 | (Music playing)
| | 02:13 | So that's kind of cool. And of course
what you're seeing here on screen is
| | 02:18 | probably looking a little choppy,
but it's going to look a lot better and
| | 02:20 | smoother on your own computer than
you are seeing here in this movie.
| | 02:24 | Now each of these Visualizers also
has a set of controls to effect what
| | 02:27 | you're seeing on screen.
| | 02:28 | All you have to do is press question
mark key on your keyboard, which is
| | 02:31 | technically the slash key, and you
will get a list of things you can change.
| | 02:35 | So you can see we have here 1 for split.
| | 02:37 | Just pressing that puts it in the
center and splits it. To a spread.
| | 02:44 | There are really no rules
that we are following here.
| | 02:46 | I am just playing around with the
control to see what's available.
| | 02:48 | If I start the music playing and I
hit 1, you can see it just starts there.
| | 02:53 | If I hit 2, it does that.
| | 03:00 | Each one of these Visualizers
has a different set of controls.
| | 03:02 | So if I switch over to Jelly and hit my
question mark button again, you see we
| | 03:08 | have a different set of controls there.
| | 03:12 | Lathe has another set of controls, and this
one really only displays song information.
| | 03:16 | So I just press I to display the song
information, if it's not on screen already.
| | 03:21 | Classic Visualizer has a lot more.
| | 03:24 | Then there is the Default Visualizer.
| | 03:26 | You can see we have some options there as well.
| | 03:29 | Again, this is really just about seeing
what's available and just hitting some
| | 03:35 | keys to see what happens.
| | 03:36 | (Music playing)
| | 03:39 | I will just press F and that
sort of freezes the pieces.
| | 03:42 | I press it again, they will move again.
| | 03:44 | Now you can also go full screen with
the Visualizer by choosing View > Full
| | 03:51 | Screen or pressing Ctrl+F or Command+F.
So you can just sort of fully immerse
| | 03:57 | yourself in the sound and light show here.
| | 03:59 | (Music playing)
| | 04:02 | Just press Escape to leave Full Screen.
| | 04:05 | So that's the iTunes Visualizer.
| | 04:07 | You can press Escape
again to completely close it.
| | 04:10 | Again, the Visualizer who really
serves no purpose other than to give you
| | 04:13 | something cool look at or to
display while you're playing your music.
| | 04:16 | So take some time to play around
with the settings and have fun.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using internet radio| 00:00 | In this movie I want to give you a
quick demo and explanation of the Radio
| | 00:04 | listing in your Source pane.
| | 00:06 | This is a feature that has been in
iTunes for a long, long time now and
| | 00:09 | basically it allows you to
listen to streaming Internet radio.
| | 00:12 | There are thousands of radio Internet
stations out there and to listen to most
| | 00:15 | of them you have to go to a specific
web site, start the station streaming, and
| | 00:19 | then leave your browser window open
to continue listening to the station.
| | 00:22 | But instead of using your web browser,
consider using iTunes to listen to Internet radio.
| | 00:27 | iTunes provides access to nearly 1800
stations and Internet radio provides a
| | 00:31 | nice alternative from traditional radio
and also offers you a lot more variety
| | 00:34 | that may be available in your location.
| | 00:37 | So selecting Radio in your Source
pane is going to display a list of Genres.
| | 00:42 | Incidentally, if you don't see radio
listed here, remember you can turn that on
| | 00:45 | by going to iTunes > Preferences or Edit
> Preferences in Windows and making sure
| | 00:49 | Radio is checked under the General settings.
| | 00:51 | So with the Radio selected I see
a bunch of genres listed and toggling
| | 00:56 | open any of these genres will give you a
list of available radio stations in the genre.
| | 01:00 | So you can see the name of the station
and under the Comments column basically a
| | 01:05 | description of what you
will hear on those stations.
| | 01:08 | To play any of the stations just simply
double-click them, which I can't do here
| | 01:11 | since I don't have the rights to play
this music in this movie, but you can
| | 01:14 | easily try this out on your own.
| | 01:16 | That's really all there is to it.
| | 01:17 | Just select Radio, pick a genre,
and double-click a station to start
| | 01:21 | playing music right away.
| | 01:23 | Now you may come across some
stations on the web that aren't available
| | 01:26 | through iTunes Radio, but many of
these streaming stations offer a link for
| | 01:29 | playing their content and you can copy
this link into iTunes by going to the
| | 01:33 | Advanced menu, choosing Open Audio
Stream, and then pasting the URL that's
| | 01:38 | offered on web site here.
| | 01:39 | So if you come across any stations that
you want to play through iTunes, you can
| | 01:42 | paste their string URL right here.
| | 01:44 | Now many stations also offer links to
download small files that will then launch
| | 01:48 | iTunes to play their streams.
| | 01:50 | First you want to make sure you go
back to iTunes Preferences and under the
| | 01:54 | Advanced tab next to Use iTunes for
Internet playback, just click the Set
| | 01:58 | button and you'll see that iTunes has
been set as a default application for
| | 02:01 | Internet music playback.
| | 02:03 | Click OK, close tab.
| | 02:04 | Then go and find stations
website that offers streaming content.
| | 02:07 | Here I am on the Wxpn website and you can see
they have a link here that says Listen Live.
| | 02:12 | I'll click on that.
| | 02:14 | Now here on their website they do
offer you the ability to just click a link
| | 02:17 | that says Listen Live to listen to
their stream here in your web browser.
| | 02:20 | But if I want to listen to their stream
through iTunes, I can just scroll down
| | 02:27 | and here I will find a link under MP3/
iTunes and I can choose either their Low
| | 02:31 | bandwidth stream or their High
bandwidth stream and I'll click that.
| | 02:34 | (Male speaker: Please support
independent non-commercial radio.)
| | 02:38 | You can see that's
launched the station right away.
| | 02:40 | Now just in case you didn't see
what happened there, let me go back to
| | 02:42 | Safari, my browser.
| | 02:44 | It actually downloaded this listen-2.pls file.
| | 02:49 | Now depending on how might have your
browser or operating system set up, you may
| | 02:52 | have to double-click this file to launch iTunes.
| | 02:54 | In my case iTunes launched right away.
| | 02:56 | Let's go back to iTunes and you'll
see that under your Music library, if I
| | 03:01 | can it here yet here. Yup!
| | 03:05 | Here it is at the very bottom.
| | 03:05 | Wxpn. Wxpn has now been added to my Music library.
| | 03:11 | Now note that this is not found
under the Radio section of your library.
| | 03:14 | This is in my main music library.
| | 03:16 | But now that's has been imported,
I can use this link to listen to the
| | 03:19 | station any time I like now by double-
clicking it and without having to visit
| | 03:22 | their website each time.
| | 03:23 | So those are the radio
options you will find in iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Sharing and Streaming ContentSharing over a network| 00:00 | If the Mac or PC on which you're
running iTunes is connected to a network
| | 00:04 | whether you're at home or the office,
by turning on certain preferences you
| | 00:07 | can let iTunes users on your network
play music and videos from your library on
| | 00:11 | their computers, and naturally you can
also play their music and videos on your
| | 00:14 | computer, if they've also said the
same preferences to allow Network Sharing.
| | 00:18 | This ability to share iTunes Libraries of
your network opens all sorts of possibilities.
| | 00:23 | Basically everyone in your network can
have his or her collection of music on
| | 00:26 | his or her computer, but still have
the ability to listen to everyone else's stuff,
| | 00:30 | or if you have an old Mac or
Windows machine sitting around, you could
| | 00:33 | install a copy of iTunes on it, import
all your music and use it to surf tunes
| | 00:37 | or videos to the rest of your computers
on your network, without taking up any
| | 00:40 | hard drive space on them.
| | 00:41 | When you're listening or watching shared
content, you are actually streaming the
| | 00:44 | content from one computer to another.
Nothing gets copied over in the process.
| | 00:49 | So let's take a look at how to set up Sharing.
| | 00:50 | Of course, the first thing we need
to assume is that you have two or more
| | 00:53 | computers running iTunes on your network.
| | 00:55 | You should also make sure that each
computer is running the most current or at
| | 00:58 | least the same version of iTunes.
| | 00:59 | So let's go to iTunes > Preferences or
Edit > Preferences on Windows, we will select
| | 01:04 | the Sharing tab, and in here we have
several options that we can turn on or off.
| | 01:08 | The first option here is usually on by default.
| | 01:10 | It's currently off, but I will
check Look for shared libraries.
| | 01:13 | When that's checked, music that's been
shared by other users on your network
| | 01:16 | will appear in the Source pane of your copy
of iTunes, which you can then select and play.
| | 01:21 | So if you want to be able to see the
songs that other users are sharing, keep
| | 01:24 | this option checked.
| | 01:25 | Next, we have Share my library on my
local network, so checking that means that
| | 01:29 | other people will be able to
see your iTunes music library.
| | 01:32 | Now iTunes is making it clear that
sharing only works on your local network and
| | 01:36 | not over the Internet.
| | 01:37 | So if you only want to play other
people's music, but not share your own,
| | 01:40 | don't click this option. But I do want to
share my music in this case, so I have checked it.
| | 01:44 | Now other people will be up to see my
songs if they have Look for shared music
| | 01:47 | check in their copy of iTunes.
| | 01:49 | Now when you're sharing your own
items you have the choice of sharing your
| | 01:52 | entire library or just selected playlists.
| | 01:55 | So if you wanted to create a playlist
just for items you wanted to share,
| | 01:57 | you could do that and then
select a playlist from this list.
| | 02:00 | If you want you can require a
password for people to access your files.
| | 02:03 | This can be useful if you're in a large
office with dozens of people on your network.
| | 02:07 | You may not know everyone or want to
share your music with everyone, so you can
| | 02:10 | enter a password and only give it to the
people with whom you want to share your content.
| | 02:14 | Other people will be able to see your
library's name in their copies of iTunes,
| | 02:17 | but they won't feel the browse or play
any of your content without the password.
| | 02:21 | Along those lines, you can only share
your library with up to five people at a time,
| | 02:24 | so dole out that password
sparingly if you have large office.
| | 02:28 | Now speaking of your library's name,
that's found under the General tab.
| | 02:32 | Whatever you type in this Library
Name field, is what will show up in the
| | 02:35 | Source panes of the people seeing your library.
| | 02:37 | So you might want to make sure you
have a distinctive enough name in here, so
| | 02:40 | people will know that this is your library.
| | 02:42 | And that's pretty much it
for setting up Network Sharing.
| | 02:44 | Now let's see how it works.
| | 02:45 | I am going to close Preferences. I get
this reminder telling me that sharing
| | 02:48 | music is for personal use only.
Thank you Apple. I will click OK.
| | 02:52 | And you can see this Shared header has
now appeared to my Source pane, and here
| | 02:55 | I can see there are two libraries being shared.
| | 02:57 | I see Melanie's library
and Phil's iTunes library.
| | 03:00 | Both Phil and Melanie have allowed
sharing their libraries in their own iTunes
| | 03:03 | Preference settings, so they're showing up here.
| | 03:05 | Notice the little lock icon next to Phil's
library. So this is a password protected
| | 03:10 | library, and when I click it,
I am prompted to type a password.
| | 03:13 | If I don't have the password I
can't access his shared items.
| | 03:15 | Melanie's library doesn't require
password though, so clicking it reveals
| | 03:20 | everything she is sharing in iTunes.
| | 03:21 | And now I can browse through her music.
I can also use the Search bar if I
| | 03:25 | want to look for a specific tune or
band, and if I see a song I want to play,
| | 03:30 | I just double-click it.
| | 03:30 | (Music Playing)
| | 03:37 | So what we are hearing now is music
streaming over my network from her computer to mine.
| | 03:41 | I am going to go ahead and pause that.
| | 03:43 | Now a couple of things to bear in mind
about shared music. As I mention earlier
| | 03:47 | this is streaming music we are
listening to. You are not copying the music to
| | 03:50 | your computer, so you can't add
shared songs to your own playlists.
| | 03:53 | You can't add artwork or change to
song information in any way, and you can't
| | 03:57 | burn these songs to CD.
| | 03:58 | You can listen to them
and that's pretty much it.
| | 04:01 | You probably wouldn't want someone
messing around with your songs anyway, so
| | 04:04 | it's pretty much a good
thing that it's listen only.
| | 04:06 | Also if any of the shared content you
want to play is purchased from the iTunes
| | 04:09 | store, you will have to authorize
your computer to play that purchased music
| | 04:12 | before you can listen to it, and that
involves getting the iTunes password from
| | 04:15 | whoever's library you are listening to,
which is probably unlikely unless you're
| | 04:18 | really close to that person.
| | 04:20 | I also want to point out that you can
toggle open a shared library to view music
| | 04:24 | libraries, movies, TV shows and so on.
| | 04:27 | So note that the Network Sharing
is not just for music; we can share
| | 04:30 | video content as well.
| | 04:31 | So, if I have a movie selected here
in Melanie's library, I can simply
| | 04:34 | double-click on one these video
files, which is the Lynda.com Training
| | 04:38 | Podcast in this case.
| | 04:39 | (Female speaker: Want to try
out lynda.com completely for free?)
| | 04:45 | And now I am watching this video
content streaming over my network.
| | 04:47 | I'll go ahead and close that.
| | 04:50 | Now once you are done listening to or
watching shared content, you can eject the
| | 04:54 | shared library to disconnect.
| | 04:55 | You can also hide the Shared header by
clicking Hide, so it's not taking up too
| | 05:00 | much space in your Source pane, and
then just click Show when you do want to
| | 05:04 | check out other people's libraries.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Turning on home sharing| 00:00 | Now let's look at a relatively new
feature that was introduced in iTunes 9
| | 00:04 | called Home Sharing.
| | 00:05 | Now Home Sharing is a little bit
different than the Network Sharing feature we
| | 00:08 | looked at previously, which we can
turn on and off by going into your
| | 00:10 | Preferences and looking under Sharing here.
| | 00:13 | With this regular sort of Network Sharing,
you can listen to and watch the music
| | 00:16 | and video content from other iTunes
libraries on your network, but you can't
| | 00:20 | copy those files to your own computer.
| | 00:21 | Home Sharing is similar in that you
can still share the content from other
| | 00:25 | computers on your network, but Home
Sharing does allow you to copy not only
| | 00:28 | music and videos, but all sorts of
other content like purchased iPhone apps and
| | 00:32 | podcasts from the other computer to your own.
| | 00:34 | Now the catch is that you can only do
this on up to five computers on your
| | 00:37 | network and you must turn on Home Sharing using
the same iTunes Store account on each computer.
| | 00:42 | I will get into the iTunes Store
accounts in the chapter on the iTunes store,
| | 00:46 | but basically your account is your
unique ID for shopping on the store and Home
| | 00:50 | Sharing uses this ID to confirm
your identity on each computer.
| | 00:53 | To turn on Home Sharing, go to the
Advanced menu and choose Turn on Home Sharing.
| | 00:59 | So I see the screen telling me what
Home Sharing is, and how it tells me that
| | 01:02 | iTunes can automatically copy new
purchases or you can choose the items you want to copy
| | 01:06 | from one computer to another over your network.
| | 01:08 | So this is the way I enter my iTunes
account information. So I already have one.
| | 01:11 | I will just enter it here, and
then I'll click Create Home Sharing.
| | 01:17 | Now in this case I am seeing this
message telling me that Home Sharing is not
| | 01:20 | activated because this computer is not
authorized to use the account. Would I
| | 01:23 | like to authorize now? I will say Yes.
| | 01:25 | Now I see a message telling me that my
computer authorization was successful,
| | 01:29 | and in this case I have authorized my
five computers, so I won't be able to
| | 01:33 | authorize another computer on my network
for Home Sharing, until I de-authorize
| | 01:37 | one of the current computers
that's currently Home Sharing.
| | 01:39 | I will click OK. Now before I click OK,
| | 01:42 | keep your eye on Phil's iTunes Library here.
| | 01:45 | That's one of the computers I have set up
at the same iTunes account for Home Sharing.
| | 01:48 | So when I click on OK,
watch what happens to its icon.
| | 01:51 | Notice that it becomes a house icon,
indicating that this is a Home Sharing
| | 01:54 | library,and you can see it says here,
| | 01:56 | use the same account when turning on
Home Sharing for your other computers.
| | 01:59 | So basically any computer that I turn
Home Sharing on using the same account,
| | 02:03 | up to five, will all show up with the little
home icon indicating that they're all Home Sharing.
| | 02:08 | I will click Done, and now I'll
select Phil's iTunes Library, and now I'm
| | 02:12 | browsing through this library, and just
like with regular Network Sharing, I can
| | 02:16 | find songs that I want to listen
to and double-click to play them.
| | 02:20 | (Music Playing)
| | 02:27 | But the difference here is I can
now copy these files to my own personal
| | 02:30 | library in my copy of iTunes here.
| | 02:32 | So if I find songs that I want,
I just select them and drag them in.
| | 02:36 | You can see that it's
copying over and there it is.
| | 02:38 | So Home Sharing is also a great way to
keep the content on multiple computers synced.
| | 02:42 | First of all I can choose to display
only the items that are not in my library.
| | 02:46 | You can see the Show menu here
currently says All items, but I can choose
| | 02:48 | items not in my library.
| | 02:50 | So now I am not only seeing songs
that my Library and Phil's iTunes library
| | 02:54 | don't have in common, which makes it
much easier find songs that I might want to
| | 02:57 | copy and that can prevent me from
dragging over copies of songs or videos that I
| | 03:00 | already have in my own copy of iTunes.
| | 03:02 | Now if I click Settings over here, I
can tell iTunes to automatically transfer
| | 03:06 | new purchases from other users libraries
to my copy of iTunes, and I can specify
| | 03:11 | the type of content I want.
| | 03:12 | For example, if both Phil and I watch
the same TV show and he downloads the
| | 03:16 | latest episode from the iTunes Store, I
can be sure to get a copy on my computer
| | 03:20 | by checking TV Shows.
| | 03:22 | Now of course, I could watch the TV
show streaming over regular network sharing
| | 03:25 | from his computer, but that requires
his computer to be on and for iTunes to be
| | 03:29 | running, and if he quits iTunes while
I'm watching a video I won't be able to
| | 03:32 | finish watching that video.
| | 03:33 | So in this case I want to make sure
that I have the shows copied over to my own
| | 03:36 | computer, so I can watch them any time I like.
| | 03:38 | So that's a pretty cool feature.
Unfortunately this only works with content
| | 03:41 | purchased from the iTunes Store.
| | 03:43 | You can't automatically sync content
from other sources, but you can drag files in,
| | 03:47 | like we saw before, or you can
select a bunch of files and drag them all at
| | 03:50 | once, or click Import to do the same thing.
| | 03:53 | So it is still very nice to be able to
physically copy content from one iTunes
| | 03:56 | library to another, instead of just
streaming over the network, and that's the
| | 03:59 | Home Sharing feature of iTunes 10.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Burning discs| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at how to
burn your iTunes music to a CD.
| | 00:03 | Now with the advent of iPods,
broadband and network sharing, there is not as
| | 00:07 | much of a call for burning CDs
today as there was a few years ago.
| | 00:10 | But there may still be times when you want
to create a custom CD of your songs or videos.
| | 00:14 | Maybe you car only has a CD player,
or you want to mail some tunes to
| | 00:18 | your friend overseas.
| | 00:19 | Whatever the reason, it's a good idea
to know how to burn a CD from iTunes and
| | 00:22 | to be able to tell the difference
between the types of CDs you can burn.
| | 00:25 | In this movie we will look at the three
types of disc formats you can burn in iTunes.
| | 00:29 | To burn a disc you need a computer with
a drive that's capable of burning CDs.
| | 00:33 | With very few exceptions, any
computer manufactured in the last several
| | 00:36 | years should have one.
| | 00:37 | You will also need a blank CD or DVD.
| | 00:39 | You can purchase those at any
office supply store or online
| | 00:42 | electronics retailer.
| | 00:43 | And you will need to create a
playlist of the songs you want to burn.
| | 00:46 | Now that last step is an absolute
requirement; you must create a playlist in order
| | 00:50 | to burn your content to a disk.
| | 00:52 | I have for example this playlist we
created earlier called Dinner Music, and I
| | 00:55 | will just use this for this example.
| | 00:57 | Interestingly in iTunes 10, Apple
eliminated the burn disc button that used to
| | 01:01 | be in the lower right-hand corner of the window.
| | 01:03 | I guess they figured that not enough
people are burning CDs anymore to take up
| | 01:06 | that space for the button.
| | 01:08 | So to burn a disk, first select
your playlist and then choose File >
| | 01:11 | Burn Playlist to Disc.
| | 01:13 | Alternately you can right-click on the playlist,
and choose Burn Playlist to Disc from here.
| | 01:17 | And the method opens the Burn Settings
window we see here and it's here where
| | 01:21 | you can determine what type of disc
you want to burn. We have audio CD, MP3
| | 01:25 | CD, and Data CD or DVD.
| | 01:28 | Now there is a global menu here,
Preferred Speed, which is just a menu to
| | 01:32 | determine how fast you
want your disc to be burned.
| | 01:35 | The default is Maximum Possible, but
there are times when the blank disc
| | 01:38 | you're using might be of lower quality
and might fail to be completely burned
| | 01:42 | in high-speed drives.
| | 01:43 | If that's the case, you can try reducing the
preferred speed and try again with another disk.
| | 01:47 | But for the most part you can
leave Maximum Possible selected.
| | 01:50 | Now as far as disc formats go, choose
audio CD if you want to create a disc
| | 01:54 | that's formatted identically to the
music CDs you can purchase in stores,
| | 01:58 | and which will play in just about any
standard CD player in your car or in a stereo.
| | 02:02 | This is the format you choose when you
want to create a CD that will play in
| | 02:05 | all CD playing devices.
| | 02:06 | The limitation to this format is that you
can only have 74 minutes of music on the disc.
| | 02:11 | Now looking at the bottom of my iTunes
window, I can see this playlist is just
| | 02:14 | over 37 minutes long.
| | 02:15 | So I am going to have a
problem fitting this on an audio CD.
| | 02:18 | Now when you burn your CD the songs
will play one after another just like they
| | 02:21 | do in your playlist.
| | 02:22 | If you want to introduce a little more
silence between the tracks, you can use
| | 02:25 | the Gap Between Songs menu to
select the amount of time you want.
| | 02:29 | If you want no gaps, choose None, or if
you want some space between the tracks,
| | 02:32 | choose anywhere from 1-5 seconds.
| | 02:34 | We also have the ability to apply the
sound check affect to our audio CDs, which
| | 02:38 | will make sure all the songs are
played at relatively the same volume level.
| | 02:42 | So if you have a mix of songs that range
from quiet to soft in terms of the ways
| | 02:45 | they were recorded, you can
even them out with this effect.
| | 02:48 | I tend to prefer not to apply any
effects to my CDs, so I will leave this off,
| | 02:51 | but feel free to use it
if you think you need it.
| | 02:53 | We also have the option to include CD
text, which is basically the information
| | 02:57 | like the song title, artist and
album from the files you are burning.
| | 03:00 | Some car and home CD players can read
and display this information, so you can
| | 03:04 | check this option if you have one of
those players and want to be able to see
| | 03:07 | the song info while the CD is playing.
| | 03:09 | Now once you have made your selections here,
you are ready to burn so just click Burn.
| | 03:12 | So you are going to be
prompted to insert a blank disc.
| | 03:16 | If you are burning an audio CD, you want
to make sure to insert a CD-R disc.
| | 03:20 | You could try burning to a CD+R or another
type of disc, but most regular CD players
| | 03:25 | can only read CD-R discs.
| | 03:28 | So stick with that format for audio CD.
| | 03:30 | Now I am not actually going to burn a
CD right now, so I am just going to click
| | 03:32 | X button up here to cancel.
| | 03:34 | Let's look at the other
types of discs we can burn.
| | 03:39 | The next option is MP3 CD.
| | 03:41 | an MP3 CD is a CD that can be played
in many recently manufactured CD players
| | 03:46 | that have been designed to read the MP3 format.
| | 03:48 | Unlike the Audio CD format, which
processes your files and is limited to 74
| | 03:53 | minutes of music, the MP3 CD format
allows you to just burn MP3 files as is to a disc,
| | 03:58 | which allows you to take advantage
of the full capacity of the black CD-R,
| | 04:02 | which is about 650 MBs and that
amounts to about 12 hours worth of music.
| | 04:06 | If your playlist happen to be longer
than that iTunes will burn everything that
| | 04:09 | fits on CD and then ask you to insert
another disk to burn the remainders.
| | 04:13 | Again, this is using the same
CD-R type of disc an audio CD uses.
| | 04:18 | Now if you are only planning on playing
your MP3 CD on computers, you can use a
| | 04:22 | CD-RW or rewritable disc.
| | 04:24 | Regular CD players can't play that
format though, so only you CD-Rs if you
| | 04:28 | intend to play your MP3
disc in a regular player.
| | 04:31 | Now as its name implies, an MP3 CD
can only contain MP3 formatted songs.
| | 04:36 | If your playlist contains any songs
in the AAC format or any other format,
| | 04:40 | those songs won't be copied to the
disc and iTunes will tell you as much when
| | 04:43 | you try to burn the MP3 CD.
| | 04:45 | So you have to convert your songs into
MP3s before you can burn them to MP3 CD.
| | 04:49 | The third format option here is Data CD
or DVD, and this format is excellent for
| | 04:54 | backing up or copying
large numbers of files to disc.
| | 04:57 | This is a purely computer-based data
format, meaning the disc is not meant to be
| | 05:01 | played in any kind of music playing
device, although you may find certain CD
| | 05:04 | players or DVD players will be able to play it.
| | 05:06 | But you are essentially using the
disc of the storage device and the files
| | 05:10 | in your playlist will be copied to
the disc just as they are in whatever
| | 05:13 | format they are in.
| | 05:14 | Once the disc has been burned, you can
insert it into any other computer and
| | 05:17 | drag the files off of it.
| | 05:19 | I say this option is good for copying
large numbers of files, because you can use
| | 05:22 | blank DVD-Rs as well as regular CD-Rs.
DVD-Rs hold about four half gigabytes of
| | 05:27 | data, so they're excellent for
storing larger amounts of files.
| | 05:30 | So those are the three
formats of CDs you can burn.
| | 05:33 | Now if you are interested in backing up
your iTunes library, the Data CD or DVD
| | 05:37 | format is a good way to go, but that
requires creating playlist of the files
| | 05:41 | you want to backup.
| | 05:42 | If you want to backup a lot of items
or even your entire library to multiple discs,
| | 05:45 | we cancel out of here, you should
instead choose File > Library > Backup to Disc.
| | 05:51 | This gives you the options to either
back up the entire iTunes library and
| | 05:55 | playlists, or back up
only iTunes Store purchases.
| | 05:58 | The option to only back up items that
have changed since last backup is nice,
| | 06:02 | so you're not constantly copying the same
files over and over again to multiple discs.
| | 06:05 | So the first time I go to backup, I
can say I want to backup of my entire
| | 06:08 | library and playlists, but if I go to
do this again, I would check Only backup
| | 06:11 | of items added or changed since last
backup and I will end up copying everything
| | 06:16 | to multiple discs again. Only the
stuff that I've purchased for changed since
| | 06:19 | the last backup will be copied to disc.
| | 06:21 | Now once you click Next, iTunes
will prompt you to insert a disk.
| | 06:24 | It will fill up the CD or DVD to
capacity and then continue asking for more
| | 06:28 | disks until all the files have been copied.
| | 06:31 | If you have a large music library you're
backing up, I highly suggest selecting the
| | 06:35 | library and looking at the total
file size at the bottom of the window.
| | 06:39 | In this case I have 2.74 GB, and in
this way you might be able to figure out
| | 06:43 | approximately how many CDs or DVDs you'll need.
| | 06:46 | I would only need one DVD in this case,
since our DVD can hold four-and-half GB.
| | 06:50 | So those are your options for
burning discs from iTunes 10.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using AirPlay to stream content from iTunes to an AppleTV or Airport Express| 00:00 | With the release of iTunes
10.1, Apple introduced AirPlay.
| | 00:04 | AirPlay is based on a previous
technology from Apple called AirTunes, which
| | 00:07 | allowed you to stream music from your
iTunes library to AirPort Express wifi devices.
| | 00:12 | But now that it's been revamped as AirPlay,
a whole world of options has opened up.
| | 00:17 | Not only does AirPlay allow you to
stream your iTunes music to an AirPort
| | 00:19 | Express device, but you can also stream
audio and video to an Apple TV, or to any
| | 00:23 | number of other third-party products
that are quickly appearing on the market.
| | 00:26 | So you'll be able to stream your iTunes
content to speakers in another room of
| | 00:30 | your house or through your
main entertainment system.
| | 00:32 | And the beauty of AirPlay is that
it requires virtually no set up.
| | 00:35 | As long as your devices are all on
the same local network, iTunes will find
| | 00:39 | them, and you'll immediately be
able to play your content through them.
| | 00:42 | All you have to do is go to iTunes >
Preferences, or if you're on Windows, go to
| | 00:45 | to Edit > Preferences.
| | 00:47 | And under the Devices tab, check Look
for remote speakers connected with AirPlay.
| | 00:51 | Now, if you want to be able to
select and play your iTunes connect from
| | 00:55 | AirPlay devices, like from an Apple
TV, you can also check Allow iTunes
| | 00:59 | control from remote speakers.
| | 01:00 | This is a good feature to select if
your AirPlay device is in another room,
| | 01:03 | because it lets you access and choose
from your iTunes library without having to
| | 01:06 | be in front of your computer.
| | 01:08 | So, we'll click OK,
and that's all there is to it.
| | 01:11 | Notice this button that not appears in the
lower right-hand corner of the iTunes window.
| | 01:15 | When I click it, I can choose to
play my iTunes content either through my
| | 01:18 | computer, through my Apple TV, or
through my AirPort Express, which is called
| | 01:22 | Living Room because that's where it is.
| | 01:24 | We even have the option to
select multiple speakers.
| | 01:26 | This allows you to stream your content
to multiple devices simultaneously, which
| | 01:30 | is a great feature that can let you
hear your music throughout your house
| | 01:33 | wherever you have an AirPlay device installed.
| | 01:35 | So, let's see how this works.
| | 01:36 | I'm going to start some music playing.
| | 01:39 | (Music playing.)
| | 01:43 | So right now this music is
playing through my computer.
| | 01:47 | I'll come down here, and I'll select Apple TV.
| | 01:49 | So even though you can't hear it
anymore right now, my music is now playing
| | 01:53 | through my Apple TV, and you can see its
progress displayed up here in the center display.
| | 01:57 | You can see that it is playing.
| | 01:59 | I can now control the audio playback
just as I can when it's playing through my
| | 02:02 | computer, although now I'm
controlling the playback through my Apple TV.
| | 02:05 | So, I could click the next song, I could pause it,
I could scrub through to the middle of the song.
| | 02:12 | And the same thing would apply if I
had selected my AirPort Express to play
| | 02:15 | my content through.
| | 02:16 | Now, let's select a video.
| | 02:19 | I'll go to Movies and let me switch back
to playing this through my computer first.
| | 02:24 | So I'll go ahead and double-click
the movie to play it.
| | 02:27 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:30 | (Doyald Young: To learn to draw a
letter well takes a long time.)
| | 02:35 | So maybe, for example, I was watching the
video on my laptop, but then I want to
| | 02:38 | start watching this on my tv.
| | 02:40 | I just need to, again, select my Apple
TV, and you'll notice that we have this
| | 02:43 | button here in the playback controls.
| | 02:45 | I'll select Apple TV. And now when I
play the video again, it's going to be
| | 02:49 | playing through my Apple TV, and I just
see this Apple TV icon here on my screen.
| | 02:53 | But you can see up here in the
center display that it is in fact playing.
| | 02:56 | So here on my computer I don't see the video playing,
but I can control its playback as before.
| | 03:00 | But just so you know, you can play
your video through multiple devices just
| | 03:04 | like you can with music.
| | 03:05 | Let me go ahead an close this for the moment.
| | 03:09 | So just select Multiple Speakers,
and in this window that opens, check the
| | 03:13 | devices you want to play your content through.
| | 03:15 | So with both computer and Apple TV
checked, when I play my video, it will now
| | 03:18 | display on my computer
screen and through my Apple TV.
| | 03:21 | I could also select my AirPort Express,
even though it's an audio-only device and
| | 03:25 | the audio from the video will play through it.
| | 03:27 | But just know that there will be a lag
between the video and the audio when you
| | 03:30 | play it through an AirPort Express.
| | 03:32 | So don't expect that you can watch a
movie with the audio coming through
| | 03:34 | an AirPort Express.
| | 03:35 | You'll need to have an Apple TV or
another dedicated video device which is able
| | 03:39 | to keep the audio and
video tracks synced together.
| | 03:41 | But you'll notice with all three of
these items checked, it says 3 Speakers down
| | 03:44 | here next to the AirPlay icon.
| | 03:46 | So if you have a large house with lots
of AirPlay devices all throughout it, you
| | 03:49 | can have the same music
playing through your entire house.
| | 03:53 | So that's the new AirPlay
feature found in iTunes 10.1.
| | 03:56 | If you have an Apple TV or other
AirPlay-enabled device, you're really going
| | 03:59 | to love this feature.
| | 04:00 | If you don't an AirPlay-enabled
device, this is a great time to get one.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. The iTunes StoreStore overview| 00:00 | In this chapter of movies we are going
to take a look at the iTunes Store, which
| | 00:03 | is the online store Apple
launched way back in 2003.
| | 00:07 | Originally the Store only sold music,
but these days you can also buy TV shows,
| | 00:11 | audio books, you can rent and
purchase full-length movies, as well as buy
| | 00:14 | applications for iPhones, iPods and
iPads, and subscribe to podcasts, all
| | 00:19 | through the iTunes Store over the Internet.
| | 00:21 | You don't need any other special
applications or websites. The iTunes Store is
| | 00:24 | built right into iTunes.
| | 00:26 | With the exception of movies you can
rent, everything you pay for on the iTunes
| | 00:29 | store is content that you then own,
meaning it's copied into your iTunes library
| | 00:32 | where you can listen to or
watch it anytime you like.
| | 00:35 | There's no subscription service with
a monthly fee or anything like that.
| | 00:39 | Now using the store is not a
necessary part of using iTunes. You can still
| | 00:42 | import, manage and play all of your
content in iTunes without ever once
| | 00:46 | visiting the Store.
| | 00:47 | But the Store is a very convenient place
to find new music and videos to play on
| | 00:50 | your computer, and if you have an IOS
device, like an iPhone, iPod Touch or an
| | 00:54 | iPad, you have to use a store if you
want to use any applications that didn't
| | 00:58 | come preinstalled on the device.
| | 00:59 | So let's take some time to
familiarize ourselves with the Store.
| | 01:02 | So in iTunes, to go to the Music Store,
click iTunes Store in the source pane.
| | 01:06 | Of course, this requires an active
Internet connection. Broadband service is
| | 01:10 | recommended, especially if you are going to
be downloading movies or other large files.
| | 01:13 | So now we are looking at the main
iTunes Store storefront. This is the homepage
| | 01:17 | of the Store and just beware that
this page is constantly changing so what
| | 01:21 | you're seeing here in this movie is
most likely not exactly what you are going
| | 01:24 | to see when you visit store yourself.
| | 01:25 | Generally on the front page you are
going to find the rotating images of
| | 01:29 | whatever item is currently being promoted,
and down below you find sections like
| | 01:33 | Music, Recommendations,
Movies, TV shows and so on.
| | 01:38 | On the right inside you will find a
list of the top charts, of singles, albums,
| | 01:43 | again, movies and TV shows and things like.
| | 01:46 | Each of these lists also has a See
All link, so you can see the list in its
| | 01:50 | entirety, and of course clicking any
one of these dozens of items will take you
| | 01:53 | to that item's page on the store.
| | 01:57 | There you can read all about the
particular item, sample some of the tunes,
| | 02:00 | maybe even check out other recommendations.
| | 02:05 | So it's easy to find yourself jumping
from item to item on the Store. You can
| | 02:09 | get a sense of where you are by
looking at the links in the upper left-hand corner.
| | 02:12 | So you can see I am
currently in Music > Pop > Bruno Mars.
| | 02:16 | So if I want to check out the entire
Pop category, I just click it and this
| | 02:20 | page is formatted much like the homepage,
but everything here falls under the Pop category.
| | 02:25 | Much like with a web browser, you can
use these back and forward buttons to
| | 02:28 | navigate to previous pages, or to
forward again, or use the Home button to
| | 02:34 | return to the homepage of the store.
| | 02:37 | Also notice the rest of this
navigation bar at the top of the store.
| | 02:40 | It makes it very easy to jump to the
music section or to Movies, TV shows, the
| | 02:44 | App Store, Podcast, Audio
Books, iTunes U and Ping.
| | 02:47 | So if I want to browse music, I just click
Music and I am taken to the main Music page.
| | 02:51 | Now you might have noticed that rolling
over these navigation items makes this
| | 02:55 | little arrow appear. Clicking that
arrow reveals a menu that lets me jump, in
| | 02:59 | this case, to a
particular music genre or section.
| | 03:02 | So if I select Jazz, I go
right to the Jazz music page.
| | 03:06 | So each one of these items has its
own drop-down menu, so you can jump to a
| | 03:09 | specific section within an overall category.
| | 03:11 | So I select the Classics for movies,
and I'm on the Classic movie page.
| | 03:16 | So it's very easy to quickly find your
way into a specific section of the Store,
| | 03:20 | and that's a quick overview
how to navigate the iTunes Store.
| | 03:23 | It could be a little overwhelming at
first, but the navigation bar at the top
| | 03:27 | really helps you find a good starting point.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an account| 00:00 | You can browse the iTunes Store in
its entirety to your heart's content at
| | 00:03 | any time day or night.
| | 00:05 | But in order to purchase anything from
the store or even to download content
| | 00:08 | that's being offered for free,
you have to iTunes Store account.
| | 00:12 | So, if you never create an account
before or have never signed into the iTunes Store,
| | 00:15 | I am going to show you how do that now.
| | 00:17 | In the upper right-hand corner with
account area where we currently see only
| | 00:21 | the Sign In button which you will see,
if you've never signed into the iTunes
| | 00:24 | store before or if previously signed out of
the store. I am going go ahead and click that.
| | 00:29 | Now, if you have an Apple ID and you
will have one if you've ever purchased
| | 00:32 | anything online from the Apple Store or
if you have a MobileMe account, you can make
| | 00:36 | sure the Apple logo is selected in and
sign in with that account information.
| | 00:39 | Apple is also partnered with AOL, so if
you're an AOL subscriber you can enter
| | 00:43 | your screen name and password to sign
in to the iTunes Store here as well.
| | 00:47 | If you neither of these things you can
create new account by clicking Create New Account.
| | 00:51 | And then just walk through the series of
screens that come up. I click Continue,
| | 00:57 | I will accept the terms and conditions,
click Continue, and now I just have to
| | 01:03 | create my user account information.
| | 01:04 | Start by entering the email address
you want to use for your iTunes account.
| | 01:08 | Now the password you enter here is not
your email password; this is password you
| | 01:15 | come up with at this point that
should be unique to the iTunes Store.
| | 01:18 | Notice it has to have at least 8 characters,
one number, one letter in those spaces.
| | 01:23 | I believe it also requires at least one
letter to be capitalized as well, so I
| | 01:27 | am going to make sure I have one of those.
| | 01:28 | It's just going to ask you to come
up with a question and answer you can
| | 01:31 | easily remember in case you ever
need to verify your identity to somebody
| | 01:34 | helping out with the Store.
| | 01:36 | So I will just type something like,
| | 01:37 | What is my dog's name?
| | 01:43 | Max Power, and then enter your birth date.
| | 01:50 | If you don't want to receive any of
these special offers or any other
| | 01:53 | information, you can uncheck these
options here and then click Continue.
| | 01:57 | Next, you are asked to enter your
payment information. When you enter your
| | 02:03 | credit card here nothing is going
to be charged when you're signing up.
| | 02:05 | This just helps to verify you as a
real person and that the card you are
| | 02:08 | using belongs to you.
| | 02:10 | But purchases you make on the iTunes Store
will be charged to the card you enter here.
| | 02:13 | Now, alternately, you can use an iTunes
gift card, so if someone has given you
| | 02:19 | an iTunes gift card or if you just
don't want to enter your credit card info,
| | 02:22 | you can pick up a gift card at say
Target or BestBuy or even many supermarkets
| | 02:26 | carry them these days, and then you can
enter that gift card info here instead.
| | 02:30 | Next, you will need to supply your
billing address and click Continue to go to
| | 02:37 | the next screen and now I see that my
account is lynda.com.it10gmail.com and I
| | 02:44 | will have receive an email at this
email address to verify my account.
| | 02:47 | In order to complete your set up, you are
going to have to sign into this account.
| | 02:50 | So I will click Done.
| | 02:51 | So in this case, I go, check
my email by going to Gmail.com.
| | 02:55 | You, of course, will check the email
with whichever service provider you are
| | 02:58 | using and here's the email and
just click the Verify it Now link to
| | 03:04 | complete your sign up.
| | 03:06 | Then enter your email address and
the password you came up with in the
| | 03:11 | iTunes Sign up area.
| | 03:16 | And I can see my email
address has been verified.
| | 03:18 | I will return to iTunes.
It takes me back to the Store.
| | 03:21 | So that's how to set up a new
account and I'm now able to purchase items
| | 03:24 | from the iTunes Store.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Browsing for content| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at some of the
specifics of browsing content on the iTunes Store.
| | 00:04 | So let's say you are in the mood for
some new music but you are not quite
| | 00:07 | sure what you want.
| | 00:08 | So right off the bat, the iTunes
homepage is a good place to start.
| | 00:11 | This is where you'll find the
latest releases as well as the top
| | 00:14 | downloaded singles and albums.
| | 00:16 | And you'll find all kinds of music in
several other categories on the homepage as well.
| | 00:19 | But if nothing here is really grabbing
your attention, you can always click the
| | 00:23 | Music item at the top in the
navigation bar to go to the main Music page.
| | 00:28 | And here you'll find only music related items.
| | 00:31 | New and Noteworthy, What's Hot, Past
Favorites, $7.99 Live Albums, and so on.
| | 00:37 | You can even get more specific in your
search by clicking the arrow in the Music
| | 00:40 | button and choosing a subcategory like
Rock for instance, and that takes us to
| | 00:46 | the Rock homepage or Storefront.
| | 00:48 | And like on the main homepage, you
can do things like check out the current
| | 00:51 | promotions, view the Top Charts, but
everything on this page falls under the
| | 00:55 | Rock genre of music, and just browse
around and click any items that interest you.
| | 00:59 | For example, I'll click this Eric
Clapton album that appears under Albums that
| | 01:03 | were released last week.
| | 01:06 | So clicking on any album takes you to
that album's page where you can read about
| | 01:09 | the album, usually you have to click
More to read more text, and you can see a
| | 01:13 | listing of the songs, as well as see
what people who have purchased this album
| | 01:17 | have also bought, and you can read user reviews.
| | 01:20 | You can also hear a 30 second preview
of any song either by double-clicking it
| | 01:23 | or just by clicking the Play button
that appears next to it when you roll your
| | 01:26 | mouse over the song title.
| | 01:27 | Now, I am not legally allowed to play
any of this music in this movie, so I am
| | 01:30 | just going to drag the iTunes slider
all the way down, so it's going to be
| | 01:33 | silent, but I do want to click one of
these, so you can see that the Play button
| | 01:37 | becomes the Stop button, and you can
see the outside of the buttons start to
| | 01:40 | fill in, so you can see how much of
the sample is left to play, and you could
| | 01:43 | all see that in the top center display,
just like you can see when you play
| | 01:46 | content from the main iTunes library.
| | 01:48 | Now if I wanted to browse other albums
and releases from Eric Clapton, I would
| | 01:52 | just click his name up here in the
Navigation area, and here is where you will
| | 01:56 | find everything available
from this artist on iTunes.
| | 02:00 | You'll also find these items under the
Artist Quick Links area, like Biography,
| | 02:05 | which lets you read a
profile in the artist. Let me go back.
| | 02:09 | Alert Me lets you tell the iTunes start
to send you an e-mail anytime something
| | 02:12 | new from this artist becomes available,
and if I click that, I'll see this
| | 02:16 | message saying, Are you sure you want to
add this artist to your list of alerts?
| | 02:18 | I can click Manage My Alerts and this
will show me any artists I am following
| | 02:23 | or when I have alerts from, then I
can either check them or uncheck them or
| | 02:26 | just cancel out of here.
| | 02:28 | The Tell a Friend link lets you send
an email to a friend, letting them know
| | 02:30 | about this artist content on the iTunes
Store, and you will also have the option
| | 02:34 | to copy the link for this page, if you
want to paste it into an email yourself
| | 02:37 | or even post a link to this page
on your Facebook or Twitter account.
| | 02:40 | Now what you see under Artist Quick
Links can vary from artist to artist.
| | 02:44 | You might not see a biography or for
some artists, you might find links to buy
| | 02:47 | concert tickets for example.
| | 02:49 | Now these social networking links, like
the ability to share items you found via
| | 02:52 | Facebook or Twitter, also
appear on each album page.
| | 02:55 | So if I click one of these albums,
clicking the arrow next to Buy Album reveals
| | 03:00 | several options including the ability to
share on Facebook and share on Twitter.
| | 03:04 | And you can also like things, which
will add them to your Ping profile which
| | 03:07 | we'll talk about later in this chapter,
and of course, you can buy the music
| | 03:10 | yourself either by clicking Buy
Album to buy the entire album or you can
| | 03:14 | purchase individual tracks in most cases by
clicking the Buy button next to each song.
| | 03:18 | I am not ready to do that yet though.
| | 03:19 | So there you have a couple of ways
you might browse for music in the
| | 03:21 | iTunes Store, and it works pretty
much the same way whether you are
| | 03:24 | browsing for Movies, TV Shows,
Audiobooks or any of these other items up
| | 03:28 | here in the navigation bar.
| | 03:29 | Clicking Movies for instance, takes
me to the main movie page, where I can
| | 03:34 | browse through the latest releases or
dig deeper by browsing through genres.
| | 03:37 | If I click a movie, you can see the
main page for this movie is very similar to
| | 03:44 | the main page for albums we were looking at.
| | 03:46 | I can click View Trailer to see a preview.
| | 03:48 | I can read about it, read customer
reviews, and I can share this page with
| | 03:52 | friends and of course, I can purchase a movie.
| | 03:54 | So take some time to browse your way
through the iTunes Store. I think the best
| | 03:57 | way to figure out how it works
really is just to get your hands on it and
| | 04:00 | wander around on your own.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Searching for content| 00:00 | Sometimes when you visit the iTunes
Store, you'll just be browsing around with
| | 00:03 | no particular item in mind, and you can
just take your time surfing around from
| | 00:06 | page to page, but other times you will
come to the Store knowing exactly what
| | 00:09 | you're looking for and
wanting to find it right away.
| | 00:12 | For those times you will want to take
advantage of the Search feature of the Store.
| | 00:15 | Now this is the same search field
you would use to search your own iTunes
| | 00:18 | library, but when you have the
iTunes Store selected, the Search bar up here
| | 00:22 | searches only the Store. Not only that
but it will also make suggestions for you
| | 00:25 | based on what you're typing.
| | 00:27 | So let's say I want to find an album by a j
azz artist I like to name John Pizzarelli.
| | 00:31 | So with the iTunes Store selected, I'll
click in the Search bar and start typing
| | 00:34 | in pizzarelli, and as I type, you can
see that iTunes was already immediately
| | 00:38 | suggesting possible
matches to what I am looking for.
| | 00:40 | And the first suggestion right here
is the one I want, John Pizzarelli.
| | 00:43 | I'll click on that, and here are my search results.
| | 00:46 | And really with iTunes suggestions
capability, it's not hard at all to find
| | 00:50 | what you are looking for, especially
because of the suggestions that pop up
| | 00:53 | under the Search field.
| | 00:54 | Usually with those suggestions I can
quickly find what I want, whether I am
| | 00:57 | looking for an artist, album or song title, and
then be taken right to that item in the Store.
| | 01:01 | Now of course sometimes your search
term might be too general or there might be
| | 01:04 | too many results for the term you type in.
| | 01:06 | For instance, if I click up here again
and type in Star Trek, none of these
| | 01:10 | suggestions are very specific.
| | 01:12 | So if I press Return or Enter to go
to the search results for the term Star
| | 01:15 | Trek, you can see here I get results
that include movies, TV seasons, albums,
| | 01:21 | songs, iPhone apps, iPad apps,
audiobooks, books, podcasts.
| | 01:26 | There is even some iTunes U
courses that mention Star Trek.
| | 01:29 | So maybe what I am looking for is a
specific episode of the original Star Trek
| | 01:33 | TV series, but the only thing I remember
about it is that the alien race called
| | 01:36 | the Romulans were involved.
| | 01:38 | Now I could come up here again and
type in Star Trek Romulan, but that still
| | 01:43 | brings up iPhone apps and iPad
apps and audiobooks and so on.
| | 01:47 | So this is a situation where I
probably want to Power Search.
| | 01:50 | Now you can see over here on the
left we do have Filter By Media Types.
| | 01:53 | So if I am really only looking for TV
shows, I can say just show me TV shows,
| | 01:56 | but in this case, it's
actually showing me no search results.
| | 01:59 | So this is a situation where I
probably want to try Power Search.
| | 02:02 | So in the upper left-hand corner here,
there is a link to open Power Search.
| | 02:05 | You can also go right to Power Search at
any time by clicking the Store menu and
| | 02:09 | choosing Search from here.
| | 02:10 | So in Power Search I can narrow down
the category I want to search in by
| | 02:15 | choosing for this example TV Shows,
but you can also search specifically for
| | 02:18 | Music, Movies, Apps and so on.
| | 02:21 | The fields you see to the right of
that menu depend on what category you've
| | 02:24 | selected over here on the left.
| | 02:25 | So I am going to type in "star trek:
| | 02:29 | the original series" and I will type
romulans in the Description field.
| | 02:34 | Hopefully there is an episode of
the show that has a word romulans in
| | 02:37 | the description. And I'll click Search.
| | 02:38 | So now I have significantly fewer
results to look through. Here are the TV episodes it
| | 02:44 | found, and really there are only two
episodes of that show that include the
| | 02:47 | description with the world Romulans in it.
| | 02:48 | One is called the Balance of Terror and
one is called The Enterprise Incident,
| | 02:52 | and these both just appear in three different
compilations as you can see under Show here.
| | 02:56 | So I can click on one of these to go
to that compilation and then somewhere in
| | 03:02 | here, yup, Balance of Terror is right
there. Click on the description. You can see,
| | 03:06 | yup, there is the
word Romulans right there.
| | 03:08 | So that's an example of
the Power Search feature.
| | 03:11 | Just remember that this feature is
available because it can be extremely
| | 03:14 | useful for finding items in the
iTunes Store that you might otherwise have
| | 03:17 | trouble tracking down.
| | 03:18 | Again, it's going to the Store menu
and choosing Search and from here choose
| | 03:23 | the type of file you're looking for
and then fill out as many of the fields as
| | 03:27 | you can to narrow down your search results.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Purchasing content| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at how to
actually make purchases on the iTunes Store.
| | 00:03 | I'm going to do a search for
Jellybricks and let's just say that this
| | 00:09 | album, "Goodnight to Everyone" is one
from the Jellybricks I don't have yet
| | 00:12 | in my iTunes library.
| | 00:13 | I'll click on that. Here on the
landing page for this album, I can see
| | 00:18 | the tracks of the song.
| | 00:19 | I can see what listeners who bought this
album also bought, like some customer ratings.
| | 00:23 | As well as double click any song to
listen to a 30 second sample. Of course the
| | 00:27 | volume has to be up to hear it.
| | 00:28 | (Music Playing).
| | 00:34 | I am going to stop that.
| | 00:35 | Now in most cases you've the choice
of purchasing the entire album, or just
| | 00:39 | purchasing individual songs from the album.
| | 00:41 | You will occasionally run into some
albums which include songs that can only be
| | 00:44 | purchased if you buy the entire album.
| | 00:46 | So instead of seeing a Buy button
next to the song, you'll see a message
| | 00:49 | that says Album Only.
| | 00:51 | But any song that has a Buy button, you can
purchase for the listed price by clicking Buy.
| | 00:55 | You will be prompted to
enter your Apple ID and password.
| | 00:59 | if you're already signed in, you'll
see your ID already filled in here.
| | 01:01 | I'll just enter my password, click Buy,
and you can see a Downloads area has
| | 01:09 | appeared over here on the left hand side.
| | 01:10 | Now I'm going to be asked to
confirm that I do want to buy this record.
| | 01:13 | If you don't see this confirmation
message each time, you can check don't ask me
| | 01:16 | about buying songs again.
| | 01:17 | But when I click Buy, I go over to
Downloads, you can see it's being
| | 01:21 | purchased right now.
| | 01:23 | This massage asks if I would like
iTunes to automatically check with the iTunes
| | 01:26 | store to see if I have any available downloads.
| | 01:28 | So there may be times when you start
downloading a file and then have to turn
| | 01:31 | off your computer or quit iTunes.
This will just check to see if you have
| | 01:34 | anything to download. I'll click Yes.
| | 01:36 | And if I had anymore to download it
would show up here, but you can see here
| | 01:40 | comes the one song that I
purchased, and there it is.
| | 01:44 | Now I can find it by
going into my music library.
| | 01:47 | Notice that downloads then disappears
from the Store, because I'm no longer
| | 01:50 | actively downloading anything.
| | 01:51 | So I could browse through here to
find the song that I just purchased.
| | 01:55 | I also like using my Recently Added
Smart Playlist, because this always shows me
| | 01:59 | the songs I've most recently added.
| | 02:01 | And right here at the bottom
is the song I just purchased.
| | 02:03 | (Music Playing)
| | 02:08 | And that's all there is to buying a
song. The process is exactly the same for
| | 02:11 | buying a complete album, only
instead of one song downloading, you'll see
| | 02:14 | multiple songs downloading.
| | 02:16 | And purchasing audio books and even
applications for your iPod, iPhone, or iPad
| | 02:20 | is very similar too.
| | 02:21 | Just click the Buy Now
button next to the item you want.
| | 02:24 | Now when it comes to movies and TV show
purchases, there are a few more options.
| | 02:28 | Let's go back to the Store, and I'll go
to the homepage, and let's go to Movies.
| | 02:35 | Now I may select a movie as an
example here. We'll go with Iron Man 2.
| | 02:41 | Notice we have four different options
at four different prices for this movie.
| | 02:46 | If I want to purchase this movie
outright, I can buy and download either the
| | 02:49 | standard definition or regular
version for $14.99 or the HD or
| | 02:54 | high-definition version for $19.99.
| | 02:56 | Both are purchases that will download
to my computer, and I can watch them
| | 02:59 | anytime I want for as long as I
keep the movie on my computer.
| | 03:02 | The iTunes Store also
offers some movies as rentals.
| | 03:05 | Again, I can view the standard
definition or HD version of the movie for either
| | 03:09 | $3.99 or $4.99 respectively.
| | 03:12 | When you rent a movie from iTunes,
you get the same quality file as the
| | 03:15 | movies you purchase.
| | 03:16 | But you only have 30 days from the time
you rent the movie to start watching it,
| | 03:19 | and once you started watching it,
you only have 24 hours to finish it.
| | 03:23 | Once that rental period is over, the
movie will disappear from your iTunes library.
| | 03:27 | Now standard definition movie rentals
can be watched in iTunes, or in iPod or
| | 03:31 | iPhones that supports video playback.
| | 03:33 | The iPhone 4, the iPad and the fourth-
generation iPod-Touch can play HD video rentals.
| | 03:38 | Now the best thing about this is you
can begin watching movie on your computer,
| | 03:42 | then transfer it to say your iPod-Touch,
for instance, if you're about to get on
| | 03:45 | a flight, and then pickup watching that
rental on your iPod, exactly where you
| | 03:48 | left off on your computer.
| | 03:50 | But the movie can only
exist on one device at a time.
| | 03:53 | Once you copy it from your computer to
your iPod, it disappears off your computer.
| | 03:57 | You can transfer it back to your
computer from the iPod, but then it will all
| | 03:59 | disappear from your iPod.
| | 04:01 | So those are just some things to be
aware of in regards to buying or renting
| | 04:04 | movies from the iTunes Store.
| | 04:05 | Let's look at TV shows now, and let's
take a look at-- let's go with Mad Man.
| | 04:18 | Now when purchasing TV shows, you have
the option of buying individual episodes
| | 04:21 | of that show or you can purchase
entire seasons, even if the season you're
| | 04:25 | buying is still in progress.
| | 04:27 | Shows that offer this have a
button that says Buy Season Pass.
| | 04:30 | The nice thing about buying a
season is that you can setup iTunes to
| | 04:33 | automatically download new episodes of
your TV shows as they become available.
| | 04:37 | To do so, go to iTunes > Preferences or
Edit > Preferences on Windows, and under the
| | 04:41 | Store tab check Automatically download
pre-purchase content. Then click OK.
| | 04:47 | You have to enter your
password again to authorize this.
| | 04:52 | And then from that point, all the
episodes of this show whose season you
| | 04:55 | purchased will download as soon as
they're available on the iTunes store.
| | 04:58 | Now it's very important to bear in mind
that any purchases you make on the Store
| | 05:02 | can be played on a maximum of five computers.
| | 05:05 | So if you buy say a movie from the
iTunes Store on your home computer and then
| | 05:08 | copy the file over to your laptop, you
need to login into the iTunes Store on
| | 05:12 | your laptop with the same Apple
ID you used to purchase that movie.
| | 05:16 | At that point you will
have authorized two your computers.
| | 05:18 | To authorize a computer with your
account, you go to Store > Authorize this
| | 05:22 | computer, then you enter your ID and password.
| | 05:26 | iTunes will then check to see how many other
computers are authorized with this account.
| | 05:30 | If it's under five, you'll get a
message telling you that you've successfully
| | 05:32 | authorized the computer.
| | 05:34 | If you've reached your limit, you'll
get a message telling you that you can't
| | 05:37 | authorize this computer until
you de-authorize one of the others.
| | 05:40 | So for example, I know that for one
of my accounts, I know that I have
| | 05:44 | pretty much maxed it out.
| | 05:47 | Now this computer was already
authorized, but you can see that including this one,
| | 05:50 | I've authorized five
computers out of my available five.
| | 05:53 | Now if I wanted to play some of my
content on another computer that was not yet
| | 05:56 | authorized, I would have to de-
authorize one of my computers.
| | 05:59 | Now to do so, you just go to the Store
menu again and choose the De-authorize
| | 06:03 | this computer, and at which point
you'll be asked to enter your username and
| | 06:06 | password again to de-authorize that
particular account from this computer.
| | 06:10 | Once you do that, nothing on this
computer which you've purchased with that
| | 06:12 | account will be allowed to play,
until you reauthorize the computer.
| | 06:15 | Also you can authorize a
computer for multiple accounts.
| | 06:19 | So if you have an iTunes account and
your roommate has an iTunes account, you
| | 06:22 | can authorize a computer to play
content purchased under both accounts.
| | 06:26 | Just have your roommate choose Store >
Authorize this computer, and enter his or her ID info.
| | 06:31 | Now if you ever sell or give away
your computer, you need to remember to
| | 06:35 | de-authorize your account info, because
authorization remains tied into the computer.
| | 06:40 | But if you forget to do this and you no
longer have access to the computer,
| | 06:44 | go to the iTunes Store, click your account,
click View Account, and then here you
| | 06:55 | find a button labeled De-authorize All.
| | 06:58 | Clicking this will de-authorize all the
computers currently authorized with your account.
| | 07:01 | And this also means that you'll have to
reauthorize the computers you still own,
| | 07:05 | if you want to access
your purchased content again.
| | 07:07 | But that only takes a few seconds, in
this way there isn't a computer out there
| | 07:10 | that you don't own that's still
authorized to play your stuff.
| | 07:14 | Be aware though that you can only de-
authorize all computers once a year.
| | 07:17 | So make an effort to track down the
computer you want to de-authorize before you
| | 07:20 | click this button, because you can only
use it once a year and this button will
| | 07:23 | only show up if you've
authorized up to five machines already.
| | 07:26 | All right, so those are some important
things you should know about purchasing
| | 07:29 | content from the iTunes store.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Purchasing gifts for others| 00:00 | Just like how you can lock into an
actual physical brick and mortar store to
| | 00:03 | buy merchandise like CDs and movies for
yourself or others, you can also browse
| | 00:07 | the iTunes Store and make purchases not just
for yourself, but as gifts for other people.
| | 00:12 | On the homepage of the iTunes Store
under Quick Links you will find the link
| | 00:15 | called Buy iTunes Gifts.
| | 00:17 | Clicking it takes you to the iTunes
Gift page, which lists ways you can make
| | 00:21 | purchases for other people.
| | 00:22 | Let's work way down this list.
| | 00:24 | Now one thing to keep in mind is that
anyone receiving your gift must have an
| | 00:27 | iTunes Store account in order to
redeem the gift. An iTunes Store account is
| | 00:30 | free, but just be aware that your
recipients will have to go through the process
| | 00:34 | of signing up for an account
if they don't already have one.
| | 00:36 | So the first item is Email Gift
Certificates. This is a nice option which
| | 00:40 | e-mails your recipient a code they can
enter into iTunes to apply store credit
| | 00:44 | directly to their account.
| | 00:45 | So if I click Buy now, you're taken
to this page where you can fill in your
| | 00:49 | name, their name, their email and
then select the amount you'd like to send
| | 00:53 | them, anywhere from $10
to $50 in $10 increments.
| | 00:56 | You can also type a personal message,
which they will also see in the email
| | 00:59 | they'll receive. You can see a little
sample of what that might look like down here.
| | 01:03 | And when we click Continue, you will
be asked to sign into your iTunes Store
| | 01:06 | account to make your purchase, at
which point your credit will be charged.
| | 01:09 | Let me go back by clicking Cancel.
| | 01:12 | Now very similar to the Email
Certificate is the Printable Gift Certificate.
| | 01:16 | This is a gift certificate you can print
out on your home printer and physically
| | 01:19 | give to someone else, so if you're off
to a party and realize that you forgot to
| | 01:23 | pick up a present, you can just log in
to the iTunes store, print out a gift
| | 01:26 | certificate, and tuck it into a card.
| | 01:28 | So we can click Buy now. Here you only
need to fill out the recipient's name,
| | 01:33 | select an amount to determine how much
you like to give them, again you have the
| | 01:36 | same options, and then you can add a message.
| | 01:39 | When you click Continue, you'll again
see a preview what the certificate will
| | 01:41 | look like, you then click Buy and
your credit card will be charged, at
| | 01:45 | which point you we'll be able to print out
your certificate and hand it to your friend.
| | 01:47 | The next listing here is to Give
Specific Music, Apps, TV Shows, Movies and
| | 01:54 | Audiobooks. This a little bit more
personal, in that you're considering the
| | 01:58 | person's tastes and picking out
an item you think they will enjoy.
| | 02:00 | If you click Learn More, you can see
that this page is just instructions on how
| | 02:05 | to make a purchase for someone else.
| | 02:07 | Every item on iTunes has a button that
says Buy Album or Buy Movie or TV Show
| | 02:11 | and each button has an arrow that when
clicked opens a menu, and the item at the
| | 02:15 | top of the menu is Gift This Item. So
by selecting that option you can purchase
| | 02:18 | products on the iTunes Store
to send out to other people.
| | 02:24 | Next we have Allowances. As it says in
the description here, give your kids a
| | 02:27 | legal way to download their favorite songs.
| | 02:29 | iTunes deposits an allowance in their
account every month, giving them access to
| | 02:32 | store without requiring a credit card.
| | 02:34 | So the Allowance section basically lets
you give a monthly stipend to whomever
| | 02:38 | you're purchasing it for.
| | 02:40 | A lot of parents want be able to control
the amount of money their kids spend on
| | 02:43 | music and movies every month in the
iTunes Store, and this is a great way to do that,
| | 02:46 | without having to give
their kids their credit card number.
| | 02:48 | They can just allow maybe $10 or $20 a
month, and that will be it until next month.
| | 02:53 | Now as it says in the description,
recipients have to have an Apple account for use
| | 02:57 | in the US store, which
you can easily set up below.
| | 02:59 | So you do need to know their account
ID before you set up the allowance.
| | 03:03 | Also remember, this is a repeating
payment. If you're only if sitting getting a
| | 03:06 | one-time gift send a gift certificate.
| | 03:09 | The allowance amount is
credited to their account every month.
| | 03:11 | Notice that you can choose send that
amount right away or to wait until the
| | 03:14 | first of the next month.
| | 03:17 | And the last item under iTunes Gifts
is iTunes Gift Cards, and this is where
| | 03:21 | you can order the actual plastic credit
card size gift cards, exactly like the
| | 03:25 | ones you see in the spinner racks near
the checkout counters of physical stores.
| | 03:29 | Basically you just click Buy now and
that will take you to the Store section of
| | 03:33 | Apple's website, where you can pick a
design, add it to your card, purchase it,
| | 03:37 | and then have it delivered to
the location of your choice.
| | 03:40 | So those are the iTunes gift
options you will find in the iTunes Store.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Redeeming iTunes gift certificates| 00:00 | If you ever receive an iTunes gift card
as a present, whether it's via email, a
| | 00:04 | printed gift certificate someone hands
you, or a plastic credit card sized gift
| | 00:08 | card that can be purchased in stores,
the best idea is to redeem the gift card
| | 00:11 | right away, even if you don't
intend on buying anything yet.
| | 00:15 | iTunes Store gift cards can only be used
on the iTunes Store, and gift cards just
| | 00:19 | place a credit on your account
| | 00:20 | that will sit there until
you actually make a purchase.
| | 00:22 | It's not like having a gift card for a
store in the mall, where you actually
| | 00:25 | have to remember to bring the card
with you when you shop at that store.
| | 00:28 | With an iTunes gift card, you just
enter that gift card information into
| | 00:31 | iTunes, and the credit will be there waiting
for you when you're ready to make a purchase.
| | 00:35 | Now if you received a gift certificate
by email, there will be a link you can
| | 00:38 | click that would take you right to
the redemption page on the iTunes Store.
| | 00:42 | If you received a printed gift
certificate or a plastic gift card, you want to
| | 00:45 | go to the iTunes Store homepage, and
here on the right under Quick Links click Redeem.
| | 00:49 | And all you have do on this
screen is type in the code on the gift
| | 00:53 | certificate or card that you
have received. Then click Redeem.
| | 00:57 | If you typed in everything correctly,
the amount of the gift card will be
| | 01:00 | instantly credited to your account.
| | 01:02 | Any purchases you make will then be
deducted from your store credit and only
| | 01:05 | when the credit has run out will your
personal credit card then be charged for
| | 01:08 | purchases. Or you can just hope people
keep giving you gift cards so you never
| | 01:12 | have to pay for iTunes Store purchases yourself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Genius sidebar and creating Genius playlists| 00:01 | In this movie I want to talk
about iTunes various Genius options.
| | 00:05 | Genius is a feature of iTunes that
examines the music you currently have in your
| | 00:08 | iTunes library and then based on
that information it can create Genius
| | 00:12 | playlists and Genius mixes.
| | 00:14 | Basically it looks at the music you
have in iTunes and creates playlists around
| | 00:18 | certain types of music.
| | 00:19 | And it can also recommend new music
from the iTunes Store that you don't
| | 00:22 | currently have, but that
you think you might like.
| | 00:25 | In order to use Genius, you have to
have an account for the iTunes Store.
| | 00:28 | Once you have an account, you can turn on
Genius, by going to Store > Turn On Genius.
| | 00:35 | And here you'll see a brief description of
what Genius is. You can click turn on Genius.
| | 00:39 | Here I'm asked to enter my Apple
ID and password for my account.
| | 00:45 | Now in order to create mixes and find
new songs, Genius needs to examine the
| | 00:49 | music in your collection, and
then store that information.
| | 00:52 | So you've to agree to let iTunes send
information about your music to Apple for examination.
| | 00:57 | Now nothing personal is transmitted and no
information is associated with you or your account.
| | 01:01 | But some people are a little put
off at the idea their computer sending
| | 01:04 | information about their music
preferences over the Internet.
| | 01:07 | So you have to agree to the Genius terms
of service here before you can use it.
| | 01:10 | If you don't feel comfortable doing
this, just click Cancel, but again, it's
| | 01:14 | really only sending information about
your music, and nobody will find out about
| | 01:17 | your polka obsession.
| | 01:18 | So I'm going to agree to these
terms and then click Continue.
| | 01:24 | So now Genius is doing its thing,
and you can see the steps here.
| | 01:26 | First it's going to gather
information about my iTunes library, then it's
| | 01:29 | going to send that information to Apple, and
then it's going to deliver your Genius results.
| | 01:33 | Now I only have a very small library,
so that happened pretty quickly.
| | 01:36 | If you have a large iTunes library,
it could take several minutes.
| | 01:39 | All right, so now that iTunes had
finished analyzing the songs in my library,
| | 01:42 | I can start using Genius.
| | 01:43 | It says you can now create Genius
playlists and use the Genius sidebar.
| | 01:47 | Notice that Genius is
appeared here in my Source pane.
| | 01:50 | So let's talk about Genius playlists first.
| | 01:52 | Basically what I can do now, is to
pick a song that's currently in my iTunes
| | 01:55 | library, I go to Music, and then based
on whatever song I pick, Genius will pick
| | 02:01 | other songs in my library that it
thinks will go well with that song.
| | 02:04 | Essentially it's creating a playlist for me
| | 02:05 | that I don't have to put nearly as
much effort into as I do with regular
| | 02:08 | playlists or even Smart Playlists.
| | 02:10 | Because with the Smart Playlist, you
still have to come up with the criteria for
| | 02:13 | the playlist before iTunes can do its thing.
| | 02:16 | So I could browse through my library
and maybe I want to listen to something
| | 02:21 | similar to California by Joni Mitchell.
| | 02:23 | So I'll select it and then down in the
lower right-hand corner of the window,
| | 02:26 | I'll click the Genius button.
| | 02:29 | And just like that I'm looking at 25
songs that iTunes thinks are in the same
| | 02:32 | vein as the song I picked.
| | 02:34 | You can see that Genius is selected in
my Source pane, and up at the top you can
| | 02:38 | see this playlist is based on
California by Joni Mitchell.
| | 02:41 | Over to the right, I can choose to show
more songs from the Limit to menu, so if
| | 02:45 | wanted a longer list of songs
I might choose say 50 songs.
| | 02:48 | If I'm not thrilled with this list, I can
click Refresh to get a new list of songs.
| | 02:53 | Naturally the larger your music library,
the more accurate results are going
| | 02:56 | to be, but Genius will also get smarter over
time and learn more about the songs you like.
| | 03:00 | And like a regular playlist you're
free to rearrange this playlist into any
| | 03:03 | order you like better.
| | 03:05 | And you can also delete individual
songs from the playlist if you want.
| | 03:07 | Now if you like this playlist so
much that you want to keep a copy of it,
| | 03:12 | click Save playlist.
| | 03:14 | And just like that a California Genius
playlist has been added to my source pane.
| | 03:19 | Saving is a good idea, because you
can only have one Genius playlist
| | 03:22 | generated at one time.
| | 03:23 | So if I go back to my music library and
pick another song and then click the
| | 03:28 | Genius button again, you can see that
the Genius is selected in the Source pane
| | 03:33 | again, but now this list is
based on All Apologies by Nirvana.
| | 03:36 | But I can still get back to my
California Genius playlist by coming here.
| | 03:39 | And I still have the ability to
choose how many songs I want listed, and to
| | 03:43 | refresh this to get another list.
| | 03:45 | So that's how to create
and save Genius playlists.
| | 03:48 | Also found under the
Genius section is Genius mixes.
| | 03:50 | This is where iTunes handles
absolutely everything for you.
| | 03:53 | There is nothing to do in
here, but look and listen.
| | 03:56 | A Genius mix is a mix iTunes creates
around your favorite music in your library.
| | 04:00 | Now Apple doesn't really provide any
information on how it determines what your
| | 04:03 | favorite music is. I suspect that it
has something to do with ratings and play
| | 04:07 | counts, but don't quote me on that.
| | 04:08 | But depending on the size of your
library, you might find up to 12 different
| | 04:11 | Genius mixes in here.
| | 04:12 | And you can see they are represented by
collage of album artwork from the songs
| | 04:16 | that are featured in the mix, and
rolling your mouse over a cover shows you what
| | 04:19 | that mix is based on.
| | 04:20 | So here is my alternative pop rock mix,
and you can see that's based on Weezer,
| | 04:24 | Ben Folds Five, Foot Fighters and others.
| | 04:26 | Here is the alternative singer songwriter mix,
Britpop and Rock Mix, Punk Mix and so on.
| | 04:32 | Again the more songs you have in your
library the more Genius mixes you'll have.
| | 04:35 | All you have to do here, just click on
any play button on any of these collages,
| | 04:39 | and the music will start playing right away.
| | 04:41 | And that's really all there is to it.
This is almost like tuning into a
| | 04:44 | favorite radio station.
| | 04:45 | Although you can't see what's coming up
next, you can be pretty sure they will
| | 04:48 | play something you like.
| | 04:49 | Now also with Genius turned on, if you
go to the iTunes Store, there you'll see
| | 04:53 | personalized recommendations for
songs you might want to purchase.
| | 04:56 | Notice we have Genius recommendations
listed here on the right, as well as here
| | 05:01 | on the main homepage, Genius recommendations.
| | 05:04 | I can click See All. So I can see
everything now that iTunes think I might like,
| | 05:08 | based on what I have in
my music library currently.
| | 05:10 | So now it tells me you have the music
by Elliott Smith, so it thinks I might
| | 05:13 | like The Velvet Underground.
| | 05:14 | I have the music by Fountains of Wayne,
so it thinks I might like Steve Wheels.
| | 05:17 | I don't necessarily agree with that,
but these are just the recommendations.
| | 05:21 | So that's the Genius feature of iTunes.
| | 05:23 | Again, if you just let it do its thing,
Genius will get smarter as time goes on,
| | 05:26 | and you'll probably find that its
recommendations, playlists and mixes keep getting better.
| | 05:31 | It does this by constantly analyzing your music.
| | 05:34 | Now generally Genius will analyze and
send info about your library once a week.
| | 05:38 | You can also manually tell Genius to scan
your library by going to Store > Update Genius.
| | 05:43 | And if you ever want to turn off Genius,
just go back to store, and choose turn
| | 05:46 | off Genius. You can always
turn it back on again at any time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Ping social network| 00:00 | If you're like me, there are times when
you're really craving some new music to listen to.
| | 00:04 | But just randomly browsing through the
iTunes Store doesn't yield anything that
| | 00:07 | grabs your interest or attention.
| | 00:09 | Now it seemed that with the iTunes
Genius feature you can get iTunes to
| | 00:12 | recommend music for you based on
what's already in your library but that's
| | 00:15 | still a computer program making suggestions to
you. Sometimes you want a little more human input.
| | 00:20 | So with the release of iTunes 10,
Apple launched a new social networking
| | 00:24 | service called Ping.
| | 00:25 | Ping is a social networking system
that lives entirely in iTunes and is
| | 00:29 | dedicated to helping you
share music interest with friends.
| | 00:32 | Many major label and high profile
bands and artists also have Ping artist
| | 00:35 | accounts so you can follow them through
iTunes to see what they're listening to,
| | 00:39 | where they will be appearing
and other information about them.
| | 00:42 | So to turn on Ping, click Ping under
the STORE heading in your source pane
| | 00:46 | then click the Turn On Ping button, you
will be asked to sign into your iTunes account.
| | 00:54 | You will have to agree to the terms of
service and here is where you can set up your profile.
| | 01:00 | So enter your first name and
last name. Select your gender.
| | 01:03 | If you have a photo of yourself, you can add it.
| | 01:05 | I am going to skip that step for now.
| | 01:07 | You can enter where you live, type a
brief description about yourself, and you
| | 01:13 | can pick up the three genres that you
like. So I have got Alternative selected,
| | 01:16 | Pop and I will pick Rock. Then continue.
| | 01:22 | So in your profile, you can list up to
10 different songs or albums that you
| | 01:25 | like for people to see.
| | 01:27 | You can have iTunes automatically
display all the music I like and this is based
| | 01:30 | on the music that you rate, review, or
purchase in your main iTunes library here.
| | 01:34 | So you can see that iTunes has decided
that I like The jellybricks, Weezer and
| | 01:38 | Coldplay, but you can also manually pick
the music you want to display or don't
| | 01:41 | display music you like on your profile.
| | 01:43 | If you do want to manually pick the
music to display, you can click in the
| | 01:46 | Search for music field to add more
covers or if you don't like one of the
| | 01:49 | choices that iTunes made for
you up here, you can delete it.
| | 01:52 | So I will search for a couple of bands
here like Who and there is Baba O'Riley
| | 01:57 | by the Who, which I like. I will add that.
| | 01:59 | And you can see that adds the cover right away.
| | 02:01 | Then I search for Ben Folds, so another one and
out of these songs, I like The Luckiest, I will add that.
| | 02:11 | Now, when you are searching for
music you are actually are searching the
| | 02:13 | iTunes Store, so even if I type
something in like The Beatles, I am not going
| | 02:18 | to find any Beatles albums because The Beatles
aren't currently carried in the iTunes Store.
| | 02:22 | So if I go through here, I am
not really going to find anything.
| | 02:24 | We have stuff like Press Conference In
America by the Beatles but I'm not going
| | 02:28 | to find any of their actual albums or music.
| | 02:30 | So let's add one more. Search for
Joni Mitchell and let's go with this
| | 02:37 | album, Court and Spark.
| | 02:41 | And you can just take your time and go
through here and add up to 10 different
| | 02:44 | album covers of your like.
| | 02:46 | I am just going to leave
those five and click Continue.
| | 02:49 | Next, you have to set your Privacy Settings.
| | 02:51 | The major part of Ping is to follow your
friends and to allow other people to follow you.
| | 02:55 | When you follow someone, you will be
able to check out their profile, see what
| | 02:59 | music they have purchased, see what
music they like, and that really helps you to
| | 03:02 | find new music yourself.
| | 03:04 | Now you can either allow people to follow
you or don't allow other people to follow you.
| | 03:07 | If you don't allow people to follow
you, you'll still be able to follow
| | 03:10 | others but they won't be able to
see any of your musical preferences or
| | 03:12 | anything like that.
| | 03:13 | Now if you do want to allow people to
follow you, you can be a little selective
| | 03:17 | about it by choosing
Require my approval to follow me.
| | 03:20 | If you don't check that anyone at
anytime can follow your profile and view it.
| | 03:24 | With Require my approval to follow me,
you will receive emails anytime somebody
| | 03:27 | wants to follow you and then you
can either approve them or deny them.
| | 03:31 | So it really depends on how much control
you want to exert over who follows you.
| | 03:34 | I will click Done and now I
see this Welcome to Ping screen.
| | 03:39 | Now I can immediately start
following other artists or people.
| | 03:42 | Notice that I already had this
recommendation of artists I might want to follow.
| | 03:45 | Maybe I do want to follow Weezer.
Click on that and just like that Weezer's
| | 03:50 | activity start showing up down here.
| | 03:51 | So this is everything Weezer
has posted to their profile.
| | 03:56 | If I start following Coldplay, I start seeing
their updates interspersed in my News Feed here.
| | 04:04 | You can also invite your friends to join Ping.
| | 04:06 | Now let's invite your friends by email
allows you to open an e-mail message with
| | 04:09 | a link that will send them through
iTunes so they can join Ping for themselves.
| | 04:13 | But if you already know they are on
Ping, you can search for people or artists
| | 04:15 | by typing in a name.
| | 04:16 | Maybe I will do a search for
myself and I will show you what my real
| | 04:20 | Ping account looks like.
| | 04:21 | So I actually three different Garrick
Chows here, here is me, the real me so I
| | 04:26 | will start following.
| | 04:27 | Now my real account is set up so that
I have to approve anybody who wants to
| | 04:30 | follow me, so what I'm doing
here now is now sending a request.
| | 04:33 | So anytime you have to send a request
that means that particular person has to
| | 04:36 | approve your request, so you just have
to wait until they get around to that
| | 04:39 | before you start seeing their feed.
| | 04:41 | But I have another computer here
beside me, which I will use to approve my
| | 04:44 | request, so you can see what it looks like.
| | 04:47 | All right, so I have approved my
requests, so let's go to the Ping menu up here
| | 04:50 | and let's check out Recent Activity.
| | 04:55 | This takes me back to the page that we first
saw when we signed up for the Ping account.
| | 04:59 | If I click People, I will see the
people that I follow. You can see people I
| | 05:03 | follow, three. So I follow
Garrick Chow, Coldplay and Weezer.
| | 05:06 | If I want to check out any of these
people's profiles, I can click on the name
| | 05:10 | and here's what my profile looks like.
| | 05:11 | You can see the music that I like up
here in the right-hand corner, you can see
| | 05:14 | the other people I follow if you look
on my feed, and by looking at the people I
| | 05:20 | follow on my feed you might be able
to find other people you might want to
| | 05:22 | become Ping friends with.
| | 05:24 | So as you can see as your Ping network
grows, you will be able to see what music
| | 05:28 | your friends enjoy, what they've
bought, and who they themselves follow.
| | 05:31 | It's a nice organic way to learn about
new music and artists and I really like
| | 05:35 | that human interaction factor of
discovering new music that you just can't get
| | 05:39 | with the iTunes Genius recommendations.
| | 05:41 | But of course in order for social
networks to survive, people have to
| | 05:44 | participate. Ping is still very much in
its infancy so it will be interesting to
| | 05:48 | see how does it does but in the meantime,
it doesn't cost you anything to sign
| | 05:51 | up so if you feel like being social,
set up your Ping account and start
| | 05:54 | following some friends and artists.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. PodcastsFinding and subscribing to podcasts| 00:00 | All right, it's time to talk about podcasts.
| | 00:02 | You have probably heard the term
before and it has definitely come up a few
| | 00:05 | times in these movies already, but so far we
haven't really discussed what a podcast is.
| | 00:10 | The most basic and easily understood
explanation of a podcast is that it's a file,
| | 00:14 | commonly an audio file, but
it can also be a video that you can
| | 00:18 | download from the Internet and play on your
computer or portable media device like an iPod.
| | 00:22 | The word itself is a combination of
the words broadcast and iPod, but both of
| | 00:27 | those words are a bit misleading,
because you don't need an iPod or any portable
| | 00:30 | music player to listen to a podcast.
| | 00:33 | And the podcast itself is not
broadcasted in any way. In order to listen to a
| | 00:37 | podcast you have to download the
file to your computer, but in its strict
| | 00:40 | definition, a podcast is not just an
audio file that can be downloaded, even
| | 00:44 | though it's becoming more common to find
web sites where producers simply throw a
| | 00:47 | downloadable audio clip on
their site and call it a podcast.
| | 00:50 | A true podcast allows users to
subscribe to a feed of the program, so that
| | 00:55 | anytime a new episode of the program
is made available, it gets automatically
| | 00:58 | downloaded to each subscriber's
computer, and that's really the advantage of
| | 01:02 | subscribing to a podcast.
| | 01:03 | You, the listener, don't have to worry
about remembering to check a web site to
| | 01:06 | find out when the latest episode of
a program you like has been released.
| | 01:10 | All you need is some podcasting
software like iTunes that you can use to
| | 01:13 | subscribe to a podcast feed, and each
time a new episode of a show is released
| | 01:17 | it will automatically be downloaded to
your computer and it doesn't cost you a cent.
| | 01:21 | Now iTunes really only acts as the
gateway for podcasters to help their
| | 01:25 | audience find them.
| | 01:26 | The podcasts are not
produced or hosted by Apple.
| | 01:29 | Apple just lists the podcasts that
have been submitted for listing.
| | 01:32 | And iTunes is not the only way to
find podcast to listen to, but it is most
| | 01:36 | likely one of the most popular ways.
| | 01:38 | You can find podcast to listen
to and watch from other web sites.
| | 01:41 | For example, podcastAlley.com and
techpodcasts.com just to name two.
| | 01:46 | But you really just can't beat iTunes
for its huge directory of podcasts and for
| | 01:49 | the ease-of-use of finding podcasts to listen to.
| | 01:52 | So while iTunes is not the only
piece of software or method out there for
| | 01:55 | finding and subscribing to podcasts,
in my opinion it's the easiest to use,
| | 01:59 | rather than going to a website,
searching for a podcast, copying its Feed
| | 02:03 | address and pasting it into a pod
casting program, you can instead do everything
| | 02:07 | from right inside iTunes.
| | 02:09 | You can even sample a minute or so of
a particular show or even listen to an
| | 02:12 | entire episode to see if you want to
bother downloading or subscribing to that
| | 02:15 | podcast, which is something you can't
do on most podcast directory web sites.
| | 02:19 | So to check out podcasts with iTunes,
First head over to the iTunes Store, then
| | 02:24 | click the Podcast link at the top of
the page, and that takes you to the main
| | 02:29 | Podcast page, and even all the various
audio and video podcasts you see here are
| | 02:33 | just a small selection of all the
podcasts that are available on iTunes.
| | 02:37 | So these sections work just like the
sections you find on the other music store pages.
| | 02:41 | You can browse through the items and
click on anything that interests you.
| | 02:47 | And here you can get a description of
the podcast, and then double-click any
| | 02:50 | episodes to listen to a sample.
| | 02:52 | If I decide I like what I'm hearing,
I can either click Free, next to any
| | 02:55 | episode to download a single episode,
or click Subscribe, to subscribe to
| | 02:59 | the entire podcast.
| | 03:01 | Remember, subscribing to a podcast
is the key to having new episodes
| | 03:04 | automatically download to your computer
when they become available, so you don't
| | 03:07 | have to remember to visit the
store to download them yourself.
| | 03:10 | Now, while a great majority of podcasts
are free, some of them aren't, but you
| | 03:13 | will be able to tell right away if a
podcast you are looking at costs money,
| | 03:16 | because you will see prices listed
next to the buttons to download individual
| | 03:19 | episodes or to subscribe.
| | 03:21 | This button says subscribe
free, so I'll just click that.
| | 03:23 | I will say yes, I do want to subscribe.
| | 03:27 | Now I am downloading the most recent
episode of the NPR Fresh Air broadcast.
| | 03:30 | Now I'll go over into the podcast
section of my library and notice it does say I
| | 03:34 | have one episode here that
I haven't listened to yet.
| | 03:36 | So it's in the Podcast area where
we will find all the podcasts you
| | 03:39 | have subscribed to.
| | 03:40 | ITunes downloads the most current
episode of whatever podcast you have just
| | 03:43 | subscribed to, and if I toggle this
triangle open, you can see I have one
| | 03:47 | episode here, and I can click Get if I
want to download any of these previous
| | 03:50 | episodes, and I can base my decision
on the brief description I see to the right.
| | 03:54 | But from this point on, all new
episodes of this podcast will download
| | 03:57 | automatically to my copy of iTunes,
and a number will appear next to Podcasts
| | 04:01 | indicating how many new
episodes I have waiting for me.
| | 04:03 | Every podcast I haven't yet listened to
will have this blue dot next to it,
| | 04:07 | making it easier for me to
see which episodes to listen to.
| | 04:10 | You can also adjust your podcast
settings by clicking the Settings button.
| | 04:13 | We can choose the check for new
episodes everyday, if you subscribe to daily
| | 04:17 | podcast, you might want to
choose that, or you choose Every hour.
| | 04:20 | Some podcasts actually come out a
couple times a day, or every week, or
| | 04:23 | manually, meaning iTunes will not check
for new podcasts and you'll have to click
| | 04:26 | the Refresh button yourself to make a check.
| | 04:29 | You can also set specific settings for
all podcast, which is Podcast Defaults, or
| | 04:33 | you can choose any of the individual
podcasts, or you can choose any of the
| | 04:36 | podcast you subscribed to, and
choose customize settings for each one.
| | 04:40 | And then we can determine when new
episodes are available, we can download the
| | 04:43 | most recent one, download all or do
nothing. And then for Episodes to keep, you
| | 04:48 | can choose to keep all episodes, all
unplayed episodes, most recent episodes,
| | 04:52 | last 2, 3, 4, 5, and 10 episodes.
| | 04:55 | I must going to leave everything at
its defaults for now and click OK.
| | 04:59 | If anytime I decide I'm no longer
interested in this podcast, I can select it
| | 05:03 | and click Unsubscribe.
| | 05:05 | Also to make sure your hard drive
isn't filling up with podcasts you haven't
| | 05:08 | watched or listened to, iTunes will
stop downloading episodes if you haven't
| | 05:11 | watched or listened to any
recent downloads after a few weeks.
| | 05:15 | You can always select the podcast and then
click Subscribe again to resubscribe to it.
| | 05:18 | It's just that easy.
| | 05:20 | So that's how you can find and subscribe
to podcasts from iTunes and the iTunes Store.
| | 05:24 | Now that said, you can also subscribe
the podcast that might not be listed
| | 05:28 | in the iTunes Store.
| | 05:29 | As an example, I am going to go to
lynda.com, and we have a weekly video
| | 05:33 | podcast, which is listed on iTunes. I am
going to rollover News and go to {odcast.
| | 05:38 | So this podcast is available on iTunes,
but for this example, let's say it's not,
| | 05:41 | and we do also provide the RSS
feed for our podcast, if you prefer to use other
| | 05:45 | podcast playing software. So I am going
to click RSS, just so I can show you how
| | 05:49 | to go about subscribing to a
podcast without using the iTunes Store.
| | 05:54 | So this is the actual web
address of our podcast feed,
| | 05:56 | feeds.feedburner.com/ldcvideotraining.
| | 06:00 | The feed is a document that contains all
the necessary information to locate and
| | 06:03 | download podcast episodes.
| | 06:05 | So if you're on a website that has a
podcast and they offer you a feed address
| | 06:08 | or a URL for their podcast, you would
select it, copy it, and then go into to
| | 06:15 | your podcasting software.
| | 06:16 | I just use iTunes again, for this
example,. Go to the Advanced menu, and choose
| | 06:22 | Subscribe to Podcast, and here I
would just Paste in the address I just
| | 06:27 | copied, and click OK.
| | 06:30 | And now I am subscribed to the
lynda.com Video Training Podcast.
| | 06:33 | And as before, iTunes is downloading the
most recent episode, and if I wanted to
| | 06:36 | get any of the previous episodes,
I would just click the GET button.
| | 06:40 | So that's how you can subscribe to a podcast
that might not be listed on the iTunes Store.
| | 06:43 | All you need is its feed
address to paste into iTunes.
| | 06:46 | So those are the ways to
subscribe to podcasts through iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Listening to and interacting with enhanced podcasts| 00:00 | Some of the podcasts you subscribe to
will be video podcasts and some video
| | 00:04 | podcasts are known as enhanced podcasts
because instead of just being a regular
| | 00:08 | video file you can play start to
finish, they've been enhanced to take
| | 00:12 | advantage of iTunes features that let you
easily jump from section to section of the podcast.
| | 00:16 | So in this movie I want to show you the
options of working with enhanced podcasts.
| | 00:20 | Previously, I subscribed to the lynda.
com video training podcast, which I happen
| | 00:25 | to be the host of, and this is a
weekly-enhanced video podcast.
| | 00:29 | Let me go ahead and play this for you.
| | 00:30 | (Female speaker: Want to access
all of lynda.com completely for free?)
| | 00:34 | Turn the volume down a bit here.
| | 00:35 | (Female speaker: Stay tuned
to the podcast to find out how.)
| | 00:39 | So, enhanced podcasts have chapter
markers built-in that the podcast creators
| | 00:43 | placed there to make it easier to jump
to a particular section of the video.
| | 00:47 | In this case, you can maybe skip over
the intro if you want to and jump right to
| | 00:51 | the main portion of this week's tutorial.
| | 00:53 | (Male speaker: In this project, we'll be
working on these two photographs, of one of the?)
| | 00:58 | Or I can jump to the next section.
| | 01:01 | (Male speaker: Now that we have both of these images?)
| | 01:03 | I'll go right to the end
where we offer a free pass
| | 01:05 | to the Online Training Library.
| | 01:08 | (Female speaker: For a free 24-hour?)
| | 01:10 | So that's an enhanced video podcast that
just gives you a couple of more options
| | 01:13 | for quickly finding sections of a podcast.
| | 01:16 | Other enhanced podcasts like certain
audio podcasts will have links that
| | 01:19 | periodically appear in this Info
window down here that when clicked will take
| | 01:23 | you out to whatever web sites the
podcast producer wants you to see.
| | 01:25 | So for example, I have this older
podcast that I don't think iTunes does anymore
| | 01:29 | called New Music Tuesday in which
they showcased new music that had been
| | 01:33 | released to the iTunes Store.
| | 01:34 | Let's turn on the volume here,
and I am going to play this for you.
| | 01:37 | So you can see the little links down
here that will appear depending on what
| | 01:41 | section of the podcast you're in.
| | 01:44 | So not only that, but it'll also have
pictures of the album covers going by as
| | 01:48 | they're talking about these different releases.
| | 01:50 | So if I were to click one of these links,
you can see that takes me to a web site
| | 01:54 | telling me about that album.
| | 01:56 | So both audio and video podcasts can take
advantage of enhanced features and this
| | 02:00 | is just another reason to use iTunes
as your podcast playing application.
| | 02:03 | Not all podcast playing software
can play or take advantage of enhanced
| | 02:06 | podcasts, so I wanted to make sure I
mention this to you, so you recognize the
| | 02:10 | options when you see them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Syncing with iPodsManaging your iPod| 00:00 | In this chapter I want to briefly go
over how to use iPods with iTunes 10.
| | 00:04 | You're certainly not required to own
an iPod to use iTunes, but iTunes is
| | 00:08 | designed to work with these devices and
manage their content, and many people do
| | 00:11 | have iPods, so I feel it's important to
at least cover the basics of how iTunes
| | 00:15 | interacts with these devices.
| | 00:17 | This won't be an in-depth
tutorial on iPods by any means though.
| | 00:20 | I am just going to focus on the
iTunes related aspects of iPods.
| | 00:23 | Now if you don't own one, you
can skip this chapter entirely.
| | 00:26 | Before we get started I can't stress
enough the importance of making sure all
| | 00:28 | of your files in iTunes are properly
tagged and labeled, meaning make sure
| | 00:32 | that all of your music files have at least the
artist, album, and song titles properly added.
| | 00:37 | Make sure your movies are named in such
a way they'll be able to tell what they
| | 00:40 | are by their names, and if you have any
TV shows or audio books, also make sure
| | 00:44 | they're all properly formatted as well.
| | 00:46 | Without properly tagged files, it's
really difficult to find the content you're
| | 00:49 | looking for on your iPod.
| | 00:50 | Now for this example, I have connected
three types of iPods to my computer.
| | 00:53 | I have got an iPod nano, an
iPod shuffle and an iPod touch.
| | 00:58 | This is so you can see some of the
differences in what options are available in
| | 01:01 | iTunes, depending on which device you're using.
| | 01:03 | And even though I am using a Mac here,
most of what I am going to go over
| | 01:06 | applies to Windows as well, and I will
point out any difference as we go along.
| | 01:09 | Now when you first connect an iPod
to your computer, you may have to go
| | 01:12 | through a series of screens where
you are asked to agree to a licensing
| | 01:16 | agreement or to register your iPod.
| | 01:18 | So go ahead and do all that on your own.
| | 01:19 | Eventually you'll be back in your main
iTunes window, and your iPod should show
| | 01:23 | up under the Devices section of the source pane.
| | 01:25 | Notice that the contents of the iPods are
organized very much like your iTunes library.
| | 01:29 | Here under the iPod Touch for example,
I have a library for Music, Movies, TV
| | 01:33 | Shows and Books and so on, just
like how my iTunes library is set up.
| | 01:37 | Now the first thing you see when you
select your iPod is that the main part
| | 01:40 | of your iTunes window is now organized into
several sections with the Summary button selected.
| | 01:44 | Now depending on what iPod you have,
you will see different categories at the
| | 01:47 | top of the screen here.
| | 01:48 | Notice the iPod touch has Summary,
Apps, Music, Movies, TV Shows,
| | 01:52 | Podcasts, Photos and Info.
| | 01:54 | If you have your iPhone connected
you would also see ring tones here.
| | 01:57 | Now the nano only has Summary,
Music, Podcasts and Photos, and the
| | 02:01 | shuffle, which has no screen and
can't display photos, only has Summary,
| | 02:05 | Music and Podcasts.
| | 02:07 | Let me go back to the touch here.
| | 02:08 | Now under Summary, you can find your
iPod's vitals, like its name, its capacity,
| | 02:13 | software version, serial number, and so on.
| | 02:15 | Incidentally if you want to change the
name of your iPod, just click it in the
| | 02:18 | Source pane and type in a new name.
| | 02:20 | This might be helpful if you have more
than one of the same iPod in the house,
| | 02:23 | and you want to make sure that
your name is associated with yours.
| | 02:26 | Now under the Version section, you'll
either see a message telling you that your
| | 02:29 | iPod software is up-to-date, or you
will see a message like this one, telling
| | 02:32 | you that a newer version of
the iPod software is available.
| | 02:35 | Apple is constantly releasing updates
to its iPods, sometimes fixing bugs,
| | 02:39 | other times adding major new features.
| | 02:41 | Generally, it's a good idea to update to
the latest version of the software when
| | 02:44 | it becomes available.
| | 02:45 | If you see the Update button is available,
just click it to download and install
| | 02:49 | the software, and of course, this
requires an internet connection for iTunes to
| | 02:52 | check if your iPod has the latest
software installed, and this also where you'll
| | 02:55 | find the Restore button to restore your iPod.
| | 02:57 | There may come a time when your iPod is
just acting plain weird. Maybe it's not
| | 03:01 | booting up right or it's locked up.
| | 03:03 | Now there are various fixes and
solutions you can find on Apple's web site, but
| | 03:06 | as a last resort, you can click the
Restore button to return the iPod to its
| | 03:10 | factory new condition.
| | 03:11 | And I say it's a last resort, because
restoring an iPod completely erases it and
| | 03:15 | installs a fresh copy of the software on it.
| | 03:17 | So you will lose all the items on your iPod.
| | 03:19 | You should have copies of everything
in iTunes anyway, but it does take time
| | 03:22 | to recopy everything back to your iPod, so
use the Restore button as a last measure.
| | 03:26 | Now under the Options section we
have several options or checkboxes.
| | 03:30 | What you see here depends on what type
of iPod you are using, but there are some
| | 03:33 | options they have in common.
| | 03:34 | First we have Open iTunes when this
iPod is connected and I think that's
| | 03:38 | pretty self-explanatory.
| | 03:39 | With this option checked, iTunes will open
whenever you connect your iPod to your computer.
| | 03:43 | Next we have Sync only checked songs
and videos, and this is currently grayed out,
| | 03:47 | because I have my iPod set up
for manual file management, meaning that
| | 03:50 | instead of letting iTunes automatically
add content to my iPod, I prefer to add
| | 03:54 | the content myself by hand.
| | 03:55 | But if you do choose to sync your iPod,
with this option checked, iTunes won't
| | 03:59 | include any unchecked files when it
copies files to your iPod, and that's
| | 04:02 | referring to the checkboxes that
appear next to each file in your library,
| | 04:05 | these checkboxes here.
| | 04:06 | So anything that is unchecked
won't be added to your iPod.
| | 04:12 | Next, we have Convert higher
bit rate songs to 128 kbps AAC.
| | 04:16 | This is a useful feature if you have
a lot of higher bit rate songs in your
| | 04:19 | library, which take up more space.
| | 04:21 | By checking this option, iTunes will
convert songs of higher bit rates to 128
| | 04:25 | kbps in the AAC format, which should
result in smaller files, meaning you will
| | 04:30 | be able to fit more music on your iPod.
| | 04:32 | So space is a concern, and it probably
is if you're using an iPod shuffle or
| | 04:36 | iPod nano, you can check this option.
| | 04:38 | The next option is Manually manage
music and videos, and this is an option I
| | 04:41 | checked before I started this movie, so
the iPod wouldn't be copying a bunch of
| | 04:45 | files while I was talking.
| | 04:46 | And again, this is the option that
lets you manually drag songs and videos to
| | 04:49 | your iPod, rather than letting
iTunes move files automatically for you.
| | 04:53 | Now the question often comes up
here as to which option is better?
| | 04:56 | Manual updating or automatic syncing?
And it really depends on whether you
| | 05:00 | prefer the control of manually
managing your iPod or if you prefer to set up
| | 05:03 | some rules and playlists to
determine what gets copied to your iPod.
| | 05:07 | We will be looking at syncing options,
but if I do uncheck Manually manage music
| | 05:11 | and videos, first of all I will see
this message telling me that all of my
| | 05:13 | content is going to be replaced,
because this will turn on syncing, which will
| | 05:17 | automatically move content to my iPod.
| | 05:19 | But if I click OK, you will see that
it does give me the option to sync only
| | 05:22 | checked songs and videos.
| | 05:24 | I am going to leave Manually
manage music checked for now.
| | 05:26 | Now on the iPod nano and iPod shuffle,
the next option here is Enable disk use,
| | 05:33 | which is always on by default if you
have Manually manage music selected.
| | 05:36 | This means your iPod will show up on
your computer outside of iTunes as an
| | 05:40 | external hard drive and you can copy files
to and from it like any other hard drive.
| | 05:44 | So if you have an iPod with a lot of
empty space, maybe you have 160 GB iPod
| | 05:48 | classic on which you're using only
about 30 gigs of space for your music,
| | 05:51 | instead of carrying around a dedicated
external hard drive, you can just Enable
| | 05:55 | disk use on your iPod and use it as a
drive to copy or move files from one
| | 05:59 | computer to another.
| | 06:00 | If I had iTunes for a moment, you see
that both the iPod shuffle and the nano
| | 06:04 | show up on my desktop as hard drives,
so I can copy files to and from them if I
| | 06:08 | wanted to, because I have
Enable disk use checked.
| | 06:11 | Now on the shuffle, we also have
Voice Feedback and here you can Enable
| | 06:15 | VoiceOver, so that your iPod will
speak the names of songs, artists, and
| | 06:18 | playlists and so on.
| | 06:20 | And that's convenient, because the
shuffle doesn't have a screen on which to
| | 06:22 | display any of that information.
| | 06:24 | Now the first time you Enable
VoiceOver, iTunes might have to download the
| | 06:27 | VoiceOver kit software, which could
take a little while, so let it do its thing
| | 06:30 | and update your iPod.
| | 06:32 | From that point on, your iPod shuffle
will be able to speak information to you.
| | 06:35 | Also in the shuffle's options is Limit
maximum volume, this lets you set a limit
| | 06:39 | on how loud music on your iPod can get,
which a lot of parents find useful if
| | 06:43 | they're letting their
kids listen to their iPods.
| | 06:45 | The other iPod models have volume limit
settings built in, but since the shuffle
| | 06:48 | doesn't have a screen, the
option is found here in iTunes.
| | 06:51 | Lastly at the bottom of the screen is
the Capacity bar, which tells you how much
| | 06:55 | space is currently being used on your iPod.
| | 06:57 | It's also color coded so you can see which
kind of media is taking up the most space.
| | 07:01 | As you can see I don't have much
content on any of my iPods right now. I have
| | 07:04 | got some on the iPod touch, where you
can see audio takes up a little bit, Video
| | 07:08 | takes up a lot more, there are some
Photos on there and some other content.
| | 07:12 | Okay, so that's an overview of the Summary
tab of the iPod management section of iTunes.
| | 07:16 | In the upcoming movies, we will talk
about how to sync your songs and videos
| | 07:19 | to your iPod.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing music and movies| 00:01 | Now let's look at how to get
music and videos on to your iPod.
| | 00:03 | In the previous movie I mentioned
that had I set up my iPod nano to be
| | 00:06 | manually managed, so you notice if
it's selected you can see Manually manage
| | 00:11 | music is checked here.
| | 00:13 | And again that means that I wanted the
option to just drag whatever content I
| | 00:15 | wanted onto my iPod.
| | 00:17 | So the way this works is once I have
my iPod set up this way I can select my
| | 00:21 | Music library and just start grabbing
any and all songs that I want to have on
| | 00:24 | my iPod and drag them right
to the iPod nano in this case.
| | 00:30 | I can also grab entire playlists if I
want and drag them to my iPod, so if I
| | 00:33 | wanted to grab this playlist of Dinner
Music I can drag the whole thing to my
| | 00:37 | iPod, and all the song in that
playlist will be copied to iTunes if I haven't
| | 00:41 | already previously dragged them in.
| | 00:42 | Notice this adds the playlist to my
iPod, Dinner Music, and that contains
| | 00:46 | the exact same songs in the exact same
order as the version of the playlist and iTunes.
| | 00:50 | But because I am manually managing my
music, the version of the playlist on my
| | 00:53 | iPod and the one in iTunes
don't stay synced together.
| | 00:56 | If I were to add more music to my
iTunes version of the playlist, let's go grab
| | 01:01 | some music here, you can see there is
two Joni Mitchell songs have been added to
| | 01:07 | the playlist here in iTunes but
here on my iPod they are not there.
| | 01:12 | So they don't automatically get
added to that playlist on my iPod and the
| | 01:15 | same is true in reverse. You can drag
new songs onto your iPod playlist or
| | 01:19 | even create new playlist on your iPod, but
they won't get copied onto your iTunes library.
| | 01:23 | Now that's not really a problem as
long as you remember to re-drag your
| | 01:26 | playlists back to your iPod.
| | 01:28 | So if I drag Dinner Music back my iPod
again, I do as well check if I'm sure I
| | 01:34 | want to replace it I'll say Replace,
and if I go look at that playlist, now you
| | 01:38 | can see the songs are being copied
over to that version of the playlist.
| | 01:41 | But manually syncing your music really
does mean you have to drag over every
| | 01:44 | song by hand in most cases.
| | 01:46 | Now you do have an option available
when you are manually syncing your music
| | 01:49 | to have iTunes to some of the work for
you. Select your iPod's Music library in
| | 01:53 | the Source pane and at the bottom of the
window we have the option to Autofill your iPod.
| | 01:58 | Basically when you click this Autofill
button iTunes will fill up the free space
| | 02:02 | on your iPod with songs from whichever
library or playlist you have selected in
| | 02:05 | this menu over here on the left. You can
choose music to select from your entire
| | 02:09 | music library or choose any
playlist you have created.
| | 02:12 | The Settings button here gives you
some control over this feature. You can
| | 02:15 | choose to replace everything
on your iPod when Autofilling.
| | 02:17 | So if you're tired of all the music on
your iPod, you can have iTunes replace
| | 02:21 | everything with songs that
weren't previously on it.
| | 02:23 | Choose items randomly is On by default.
Now without this checked iTunes will just
| | 02:27 | work in order down your playlist or
library. You probably do want to keep that
| | 02:31 | checked if you want some variety.
| | 02:32 | And you have the option to choose
higher rated items more often, so if you are
| | 02:36 | in habit of rating your music, you
can check this option so more of your
| | 02:39 | favorite songs show up more frequently.
| | 02:41 | Additionally you can allocate space to
leave free in case you want to use the
| | 02:44 | iPod as an external hard drive,
which we looked at in the previous movie.
| | 02:47 | Just use the slider to determine how
much space you want to leave free.
| | 02:51 | iTunes will then fill up the rest with music.
| | 02:52 | I am just going to leave mind set to 0.
| | 02:55 | Now when you are ready to go you click
OK in here and then click Autofill and
| | 02:59 | iTunes will do its thing and
start filling up your iPod with music.
| | 03:02 | So the Autofilll option is only
available if you manually manage your songs.
| | 03:05 | Now let's talk about
automatically syncing your songs.
| | 03:09 | To set that up, select your iPod,
and then go to the Music tab, and then
| | 03:14 | here check Sync Music.
| | 03:15 | Now it's very important to note here
that doing so will erase all of the
| | 03:19 | existing content on your iPod, because
if you want the items on your iPod and
| | 03:23 | iTunes playlist, whatever you are
syncing, with to be identical, iTunes has to
| | 03:27 | wipe off what's already on the iPod.
| | 03:29 | But for this example I'm okay with erasing
everything on the iPod so I'll click Sync Music.
| | 03:33 | Now just that you see this when I go
back to the Summary tab, you'll see that
| | 03:37 | Manually manage music has been unchecked.
| | 03:40 | I can now check Sync only checked songs,
which again, when I select that, will
| | 03:46 | only copy over songs that are checked,
if I have any of these unchecked they
| | 03:49 | won't be copied over. Let
me go back to the nano here.
| | 03:52 | Lets go back to Music
and check Sync Music again.
| | 03:59 | So currently I have an entire Music
library checked, meaning every single
| | 04:02 | song in my Music library excluding
unchecked songs if I have that option
| | 04:05 | selected will be copied over, or
I can choose to sync only selected
| | 04:09 | playlists, artists, albums, and genres.
| | 04:12 | Now especially with the iPod nano and
the shuffle, it's getting increasingly
| | 04:15 | likely that the size of your iTunes
library will exceed the size of your iPod.
| | 04:19 | In fact, if you look at the bar at
the bottom of your screen, if your entire
| | 04:22 | music library is too large for your
iPod you'll see a little message that says
| | 04:26 | over capacity down here.
| | 04:28 | So syncing your entire
library might not be an option.
| | 04:30 | If that's the case, choose Selected
playlists, artists, albums, and genres, and
| | 04:35 | now you have a column of your playlists,
a column of your artists, a column of
| | 04:39 | genres, and a column of albums.
| | 04:41 | All you have to do here is to make your
way through these lists and select the
| | 04:44 | items you want sync to your iPod.
| | 04:45 | The beauty of this is that once you've made
your selections you don't have to do anything else.
| | 04:50 | So for instance if I have The Beatles
selected under Artists, all of my Beatles
| | 04:55 | music will get copied to my iPod.
But if I later added Beatles album that I
| | 04:58 | didn't previously have in iTunes the
next time I sync my iPod that new Beatles
| | 05:02 | album will automatically be copied to my iPod.
| | 05:04 | And as you click things you can just keep an
eye on the Capacity bar at the bottom here.
| | 05:08 | Now if you want to make sure all the
new songs you've added to iTunes recently
| | 05:17 | get out of your playlist you may want to
check the Recently Added Smart Playlist
| | 05:21 | that's in iTunes by default.
| | 05:23 | And again this playlist collects all
the songs added in the past two weeks,
| | 05:26 | although you are welcome to modify
the smart playlist that find songs added
| | 05:29 | longer ago in case you
don't sync your iPod that often.
| | 05:32 | Now two more options we have here
are Include music videos, so if you
| | 05:36 | purchase music videos from the iTunes
store or if you've added video content
| | 05:39 | from elsewhere and tagged it as a
music video those files will be included
| | 05:42 | when you sync your iPod.
| | 05:44 | And we have Automatically fill free
space with songs, which as its name implies
| | 05:48 | fills up remaining space on your
iPod with other songs from your library.
| | 05:51 | Although Apple doesn't really offer any
documentation on how it picks that content.
| | 05:55 | Personally my thought is that if you've
gone to the trouble to select specific
| | 05:58 | playlists, artists, or genres to sync,
why would you want to select a bunch of random
| | 06:02 | songs on your iPod as well?
| | 06:03 | But if that's what you want you can
check this option and once you're done
| | 06:06 | making your selections click Sync or
Apply down in the lower right-hand corner
| | 06:10 | and iTunes will begin
copying the files to your iPod.
| | 06:12 | So that's how you can both manually
and automatically sync music to your iPod.
| | 06:16 | And it works pretty much the same way
for movies, TV shows, podcasts, audiobooks
| | 06:20 | and iTunes U content.
| | 06:22 | If you have your iPod set up for manual
updating you can just drag all of that
| | 06:26 | sort content to your iPod, but under
each one of these tabs, podcast for
| | 06:30 | example, is an option to sync them,
and then in each case you can choose what
| | 06:34 | sort of content to sync.
| | 06:36 | Now my iPod nano doesn't support video,
so let's go take a look at the iPod
| | 06:39 | touch for example. I'm just not going
to apply any of those changes I made to
| | 06:42 | my nano at the moment.
| | 06:43 | But if I select movies here you can
see we have sync movies selected and in
| | 06:47 | this case we can choose to sync all
movies, the third most recent ones, the
| | 06:51 | last five most recent and so on. Or
if I have TV shows selected, I can choose
| | 06:56 | to sync all of my TV shows or just all
unwatched, 3 newest, 3 newest unwatched, and so on.
| | 07:03 | All of these sections are
fairly self-explanatory.
| | 07:05 | Now when it comes to copying items like
photos, contacts, and calendars to your iPod,
| | 07:09 | the process between Macs and
Windows computers is different, so we'll look
| | 07:13 | at both platforms in turn
in the next couple of movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing photos from a Mac| 00:00 | If you have an iPod with a color screen,
it supports photos, meaning you can
| | 00:03 | copy pictures from your computer to
your iPod and then display those photos on
| | 00:07 | the iPod screen to share with your
friends, or with the right accessory cable,
| | 00:11 | you can connect your iPod to a TV
and share a slideshow of your photos
| | 00:14 | directly from the iPod.
| | 00:15 | So let's take a look at how to
sync photos from a Mac to your iPod.
| | 00:18 | I still have my iPod touch attached to
my Mac and with it selected, I am going
| | 00:22 | to go to the Photos section.
| | 00:23 | All I have to do here is check Sync
photos from, and then select where I want
| | 00:28 | the photos to come from.
| | 00:30 | Now, you can only sync your photos from
one location on your Mac, so it matters
| | 00:33 | where you store the photos
you want to copy to your iPod.
| | 00:36 | You can choose your Pictures folder,
which is located in your Home folder, or
| | 00:39 | you can choose any other folder on your
Mac if you have your photos stored elsewhere.
| | 00:42 | But if you have iPhoto on your Mac,
which is part of the iLife suite of
| | 00:45 | applications and you use it to manage
and organize your digital photos, which
| | 00:48 | you really should, select iPhoto from this menu.
| | 00:51 | Now, the default setting is to copy
all photos, albums, events, and faces to
| | 00:55 | your iPod, but if you have thousands of
photos in your iPhoto library, you might
| | 00:58 | not want to copy every single photo over.
| | 01:00 | In that case, choose Selected albums,
events, faces, and automatically include events,
| | 01:05 | and then you can choose
which events you want to include.
| | 01:07 | All of them, the most recent event, the
three most recent, or so on and so on.
| | 01:11 | Now, we also have the option to
include any videos that are stored in iPhoto.
| | 01:15 | So if you've taken videos with your
digital still camera, and they're in
| | 01:18 | iPhoto, you can choose to have those
copied over if they fall into one of the
| | 01:21 | categories you select below.
| | 01:22 | So you can see here we have albums,
events, and faces to choose from.
| | 01:26 | Let's go over to iPhoto and see
where this information is coming from.
| | 01:29 | So here in iPhoto, you can see I have
a collection of photographs that are
| | 01:32 | organized into events as well as an
album or two that I have created, and under
| | 01:36 | Faces, I have taken advantage of iPhoto
'09's face recognition technology where
| | 01:41 | you can find photos
based on who appears in them.
| | 01:44 | So here in iTunes, I can now choose
to copy photos to my iPod based on the
| | 01:47 | albums, events, or faces.
| | 01:48 | So I'll choose let's say all of the
faces, I'll choose my travel album, and
| | 01:54 | maybe Late 2008, and let's
pick some events here as well.
| | 02:00 | Notice that a number appears next to
each item I check, telling me how many
| | 02:03 | photos are going to be copied over.
| | 02:05 | So that's basically it.
| | 02:06 | All I've to do now is click Apply.
| | 02:08 | It might also be labeled sync.
| | 02:10 | If I had any photos currently on my iPod
touch, they would be replaced with this
| | 02:13 | current batch and that's fine in this case.
| | 02:15 | So I'll click Replace Photos, and now all of
my photos are being copied over in my iPod.
| | 02:20 | Now just so you know, when you copy
photos to your iPod, iTunes will actually
| | 02:24 | optimize them for the iPod
before transferring them over.
| | 02:27 | Basically since most cameras these days
are taking anywhere from 7 to 12 to 15
| | 02:31 | megapixel images, you probably don't
want these huge files taking up space on
| | 02:35 | your iPod, where you're only going to
be displaying them on the iPod screen.
| | 02:38 | Even if you're connecting your iPod
to a TV, there's still no need to have a
| | 02:41 | large file version of your images on
your iPod, so iTunes will compress the
| | 02:45 | images so they don't take up that much space.
| | 02:47 | But if you use your iPod nano or
Classic as a portable hard-drive and you'd
| | 02:51 | like to have the full resolution
versions of your images available in case you
| | 02:54 | want to print them or copy them onto
another computer, there is an option
| | 02:57 | available, not here on the iPod touch, but let
me select my iPod nano and choose Sync Photos.
| | 03:02 | You can see we have the option
of Include full-resolution photos.
| | 03:05 | That will place a copy of the full-
resolution photo into the Photos folder on your iPod.
| | 03:10 | So you'll still be able to look at
the optimized version when you view the
| | 03:12 | photos on your iPod's screen, but the
full-resolution versions will show up in
| | 03:16 | the iPod's Photos folder when
you connect it to a computer.
| | 03:19 | Just make sure that you have Enable
disk use checked here on the Summary page.
| | 03:24 | I am not going to apply any of those
changes I just made, reselected my iPod
| | 03:27 | touch and yes, it looks like my
photos have synced to my iPod touch.
| | 03:30 | Let's go and see what that looks like.
| | 03:31 | Here on my iPod touch, I can now navigate
into photos, and view the photos I copied over.
| | 03:37 | As you can see, I can navigate by
the albums I created, as well as with
| | 03:44 | events and faces, and these are all
just as they appeared in my iPhoto
| | 03:48 | library on my Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing photos from a Windows computer| 00:00 | If you have an iPod with a color screen,
it supports photos, meaning you can
| | 00:04 | copy pictures from your computer to
your iPod and then display those photos on
| | 00:07 | the iPod screen to share them with
your friends, or with the right accessory
| | 00:11 | cable, you can connect your iPod to a
TV and share a slideshow of your photos
| | 00:15 | directly from the iPod.
| | 00:16 | So let's take a look at how to sync
photos from a Windows machine to your iPod.
| | 00:19 | I have my iPod touch attached to my PC
and with it selected, I'm going to go to
| | 00:24 | the Photos tab and all I have to do
here is check Sync photos from and then
| | 00:29 | select where I want my photos to come from.
| | 00:31 | Now, you can only sync your photos
from one location on your PC, so it does
| | 00:34 | matter where you store the photos
you want to have copied to your iPod.
| | 00:37 | You can choose your My Pictures folder,
which you can see that if you go to the
| | 00:41 | Start menu, and to Pictures, that's your
Pictures folder right there, and you can
| | 00:47 | see in here I have three folders of
images for my trips to Australia, Southern
| | 00:51 | Nevada, and Taiwan. Sample pictures is
the folder that appears here by default.
| | 00:55 | So if I go back to iTunes,
I'll keep my picture selected.
| | 00:59 | Now, if you do have them in another
location, you could click Choose Folder to
| | 01:02 | choose that location, but my photos
for this example are in My Pictures.
| | 01:05 | So, by default, all of my folders
within the My Pictures folders are going to
| | 01:08 | sync with my iPod. Or I can choose
Selected Folders Only and that lets me
| | 01:13 | choose which folders of
images I want to copy to my iPod.
| | 01:15 | So maybe I only want to copy my
Australia and Taiwan photos over.
| | 01:19 | But that's basically it.
| | 01:21 | Now, I click Apply.
| | 01:21 | If you already have photos on your iPod,
you might see this message telling you
| | 01:25 | that the photos you're currently syncing
over are going to replace the ones that
| | 01:28 | are already on your iPod.
| | 01:29 | I'm okay with that in this case.
| | 01:31 | So I'll click Replace Photos, and now my
photos are being copied over to my iPod.
| | 01:35 | Now, when you copy your photos to your
iPod, iTunes will actually optimize them
| | 01:38 | for the iPod before transferring them over.
| | 01:40 | You can see here it says optimizing 2 of 12.
| | 01:43 | Basically, since most cameras these
days are taking anywhere from 7 to 15
| | 01:47 | megapixel images, you probably don't
want these huge files taking up space on
| | 01:50 | your iPod, where you're only going to be
displaying these photos on your iPod's screen.
| | 01:54 | Even if you're connecting your iPod to
a TV, there's still no need to have the
| | 01:57 | large file versions of your images on your iPod.
| | 02:00 | So iTunes will compress the images
so they don't take up that much space.
| | 02:03 | But if you use your iPod as a
portable hard-drive and you want to have the
| | 02:06 | full-resolution versions of your images
available in case you want to print them
| | 02:10 | or copy them onto another
computer, there is an option available.
| | 02:13 | It's not available on the iPod Touch
but let me select the nano and go to
| | 02:17 | Photos, and here I'll choose Sync
Photos, and you see here we have an option
| | 02:21 | called Include full-resolution photos.
| | 02:23 | With that checked, copies of the full-
resolution versions of your photos will be
| | 02:27 | copied into the Photos folder on your iPod.
| | 02:29 | So you'll still be looking at the
optimized version when you view the photos on
| | 02:32 | your iPod's screen, but the full-
resolution versions will show up in the iPod's
| | 02:36 | Photos folder when you connect it to a computer.
| | 02:38 | Just make sure that under the
Summary tab, Enable disk use is selected.
| | 02:43 | But that's basically it.
| | 02:44 | I can see that my photos are
now synced over to my iPod.
| | 02:47 | So let's see what that looks like.
| | 02:49 | So here on my iPod, I can tap photos,
and right here, you can see that my
| | 02:53 | Australia and Taiwan
photos have been copied over.
| | 02:57 | The photos inside those folders
are now available to view on my iPod.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing contacts and calendars from a Mac| 00:00 | In addition to copying your music,
movies, and photos to your iPod most current
| | 00:04 | iPods also support the syncing
of your contacts and calendars.
| | 00:07 | So if you carry around your iPod or
iPhone all the time, you have quick access
| | 00:11 | to your addresses, phone numbers and schedule.
| | 00:13 | The process is just slightly
different between Macs and Windows, so in this
| | 00:16 | movie we'll look at how this works
on a Mac. If you're on Windows you can
| | 00:19 | jump to the next movie.
| | 00:20 | So here in iTunes I've my iPod touch
selected. I'm going to go to the Info tab.
| | 00:25 | If you're using an iPod classic or
an older iPod nano you'll click the
| | 00:29 | tab labeled Contacts.
| | 00:30 | The current generation of iPod nano
doesn't support copying contacts over.
| | 00:33 | Now when you're working on a Mac
your contact information comes from your
| | 00:36 | Address Book application
found in your Applications folder.
| | 00:39 | So here I've created a few example
contacts, but you can see I've also created
| | 00:42 | some Address Book groups
like Family, Friends and Work.
| | 00:45 | Now back here on iTunes I can check
Sync Address Book Contacts, and then I
| | 00:49 | choose whether I want to sync all of my
contacts from my Address Book over to my
| | 00:52 | iPod or just selected groups.
| | 00:54 | If I choose groups, I can
then select which groups I want.
| | 00:57 | May be I just want to copy over my
Family and Friends contacts to my iPod.
| | 01:01 | Now if you have an iPod touch or an
iPhone you do have the ability to create
| | 01:05 | contacts on those devices.
| | 01:07 | So you have an option here that says
Add contacts created outside the groups on
| | 01:10 | this iPod to, and you can choose to
automatically add new contacts to one of the
| | 01:14 | two groups I'm syncing over here.
| | 01:16 | I'm just going to leave that unchecked.
| | 01:18 | Now if you use Yahoo! Mail
| | 01:19 | or Google Mail, also known as Gmail,
and you have contact information stored
| | 01:23 | with those services, you can choose
to sync those devices here as well.
| | 01:26 | I'm just going to ignore this for now,
but if you click any of these you'll be
| | 01:29 | asked to agree to allow iTunes to grab
this information from your account, so
| | 01:33 | you can sync to your device.
| | 01:34 | And that's really all there is to
syncing your contacts to your iPod.
| | 01:37 | Now before I click Apply to copy those
contacts over, let's look at calendars.
| | 01:41 | Now on a Mac your calendar
information is going to come from iCal, another
| | 01:44 | application that's included with Mac
OS X and found in your Applications folder.
| | 01:48 | So in here I've calendars for home-
related events, work-related events, and
| | 01:52 | a workout schedule.
| | 01:53 | And you're always free to create other
calendars like maybe medical appointments
| | 01:56 | or important birthdays.
| | 01:58 | So back in iTunes I check Sync iCal Calendars.
| | 02:02 | And like with contacts I can just sync
all of my calendars or just select the
| | 02:05 | calendars, and maybe I only want my
home and workout schedules on my iPod.
| | 02:10 | We also have the option to not sync
events older than X number of days, which
| | 02:15 | is useful if you don't want a bunch of old
appointments taking up space on your device.
| | 02:18 | So once I'm done with my contact and
calendar settings I just click Apply to
| | 02:22 | send all that info over to my iPod.
| | 02:24 | Okay, so the syncing is done. Now you
might have noticed that a calendar labeled
| | 02:28 | Calendar has now appeared here in
iTunes and that's actually a calendar that
| | 02:31 | existed on my iPod touch,
which is now sync to iTunes.
| | 02:34 | Okay, but now that everything is
synced over, let's take a look and see what
| | 02:36 | this looks like on my iPod.
| | 02:38 | So here on my iPod I can tap
Contacts, and you can see here are all the
| | 02:42 | contacts I copied over, including the groups
I copied over, in this case Family and Friends.
| | 02:48 | And if I open up my Calendar app,
here is my Calendar, you can see all the
| | 02:51 | dates have been added and if I go look
at the calendars, sure enough, there we
| | 02:56 | have Home and Workout, the two calendars that
I synced over for my copy of iCal on my Mac.
| | 03:00 | So that's how we sync contacts and
calendars to your iPod through your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing contacts and calendars from a Windows computer| 00:00 | In addition to copying your music,
movies, and photos to your iPod, most iPods
| | 00:04 | also support the syncing of
your contacts and calendars.
| | 00:07 | So if you carry around your iPod or
iPhone all the time you have quick access to
| | 00:10 | your addresses, phone numbers, and schedule.
| | 00:12 | In this movie we'll look at how
this works on Windows machines.
| | 00:15 | If you're on a Mac, check out the
previous movie for info on how to sync
| | 00:18 | contacts and calendars with your iPod.
| | 00:19 | Here in iTunes I have my iPod touch
selected and I'm going to go over to the Info tab.
| | 00:24 | If you're using an iPod classic
you'll click the tab labeled Contacts.
| | 00:28 | If you don't see the Info or the
Contacts button, your iPod doesn't support
| | 00:31 | syncing contacts or
calendars with your computer.
| | 00:33 | So when you're working with a PC you can
choose to sync your contact information
| | 00:37 | with Microsoft Outlook 2003, 2007 or 2010.
| | 00:41 | If you have any of those versions installed.
| | 00:43 | If not, here on Windows 7 or on
Windows Vista you have your Windows contacts,
| | 00:47 | which you can find by going to the
Start menu, to your user folder, and then
| | 00:51 | inside Contacts, and in here
you can add and manage contacts.
| | 00:55 | You can see we can add new contacts and
I have a couple of sample contacts I've
| | 00:58 | already created in here.
| | 00:59 | I've even created a couple of groups
like the Family group and the Work group.
| | 01:05 | So back in iTunes I'll check Sync
Contacts with and I have Windows Contacts selected.
| | 01:09 | Again you can choose from Outlook. You
can also choose from Google or your Yahoo!
| | 01:13 | address book if you use Gmail or Yahoo! Mail,
| | 01:15 | but I'm using Windows
Contacts so I have that selected.
| | 01:18 | And here you can see I can choose to
copy all of my contacts from Windows to my iPod,
| | 01:22 | or I can just use Selected groups.
| | 01:24 | If I choose groups I can select which
groups I want. Maybe I just want to copy
| | 01:28 | my Family contacts over to my iPod.
| | 01:30 | On the iPod touch and the iPhone you
can also generate contacts on your device
| | 01:33 | itself to sync back to your computer.
| | 01:36 | You can check Add contacts created
outside of groups on this iPod to, and then
| | 01:39 | you can choose which group you want to have
as the default. The new contacts are added too.
| | 01:43 | If you don't want new contacts added to
any of your groups you can just uncheck that.
| | 01:47 | And that's really all there is to
syncing your contacts to your iPod.
| | 01:50 | Now before I click Apply to copy the
contacts over, let's look at calendars.
| | 01:54 | I am going to come here and check Sync
Calendars with and pretty much your only
| | 01:58 | choice here is Outlook.
| | 02:00 | So on Windows your calendar information
has to come from Outlook 2003, 2007 or 2010.
| | 02:05 | So if you don't have Outlook
installed you can't sync calendar info with
| | 02:08 | your iPod, but I do have Outlook
installed on this computer and I have a
| | 02:11 | couple of calendars.
| | 02:12 | And as with contacts I can choose to sync all
of my calendars or just select the calendars.
| | 02:16 | And these are the calendar groups
I've created on my copy of Outlook.
| | 02:19 | So maybe I only want my Home and
my Workout calendars on my iPod.
| | 02:24 | We also have the option here, not
to sync events older than x number of days,
| | 02:27 | because in most cases you
might not need old appointments taking up
| | 02:30 | space on your iPod.
| | 02:32 | So once I'm done with my contact and
calendar settings, I just click Apply to
| | 02:35 | send all that info over.
| | 02:36 | And you can watch the progress up here in
the center display of the iTunes window.
| | 02:40 | All right, so the syncing is done,
let's see what that looks like.
| | 02:43 | So here on my iPod I can tap Contacts,
and here on the groups that I created and
| | 02:48 | synced over, and I can also tap my
calendar app, and here you can see the Home
| | 02:56 | and Workout calendars that I synced over.
| | 02:58 | So that's how you sync your contacts
and your calendars with your iPod from Windows.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | And that's it.
| | 00:01 | I hope you've enjoyed learning all about
iTunes and that you'll be able to take
| | 00:04 | advantage of all the cool features and
tips you've learned here by applying your
| | 00:07 | knowledge to your own iTunes library.
| | 00:09 | So enjoy working and playing with iTunes.
| | 00:12 | I'm Garrick Chow. See you next time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
